Fixes part of a problem reading deliberately non-conforming ELF binaries - where a
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
4b95cf5c 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
1db37fe6 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
1db37fe6 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a
DJ
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
252b5132
RH
711@ifset UsesEnvVars
712The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 713@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
714some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715@end ifset
716
717The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721@cindex emulation
722@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 723@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
724Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731configured.
732
733@cindex link map
734@kindex -M
735@kindex --print-map
736@item -M
737@itemx --print-map
738Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739information about the link, including the following:
740
741@itemize @bullet
742@item
3b83e13a 743Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
744@item
745How common symbols are allocated.
746@item
747All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
749@item
750The values assigned to symbols.
751
752Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758linker script containing:
759
760@smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764@end smallexample
765
766will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767option is used:
768
769@smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773@end smallexample
774
775See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776scripts.
252b5132
RH
777@end itemize
778
779@kindex -n
780@cindex read-only text
781@cindex NMAGIC
782@kindex --nmagic
783@item -n
784@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
785Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
788
789@kindex -N
790@kindex --omagic
791@cindex read/write from cmd line
792@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 793@item -N
252b5132
RH
794@itemx --omagic
795Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
796not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
798mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
801
802@kindex --no-omagic
803@cindex OMAGIC
804@item --no-omagic
805This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
809
810@kindex -o @var{output}
811@kindex --output=@var{output}
812@cindex naming the output file
813@item -o @var{output}
814@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 815Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
816option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819@kindex -O @var{level}
820@cindex generating optimized output
821@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 822If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 823the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
824should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 829
a712da20
NC
830@kindex -q
831@kindex --emit-relocs
832@cindex retain relocations in final executable
833@item -q
834@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 835Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
836Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
837order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
838in larger executables.
839
dbab7a7b
NC
840This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
841
4f471f39
RS
842@kindex --force-dynamic
843@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
844@item --force-dynamic
845Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
846to VxWorks targets.
847
252b5132
RH
848@cindex partial link
849@cindex relocatable output
850@kindex -r
1049f94e 851@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 852@item -r
1049f94e 853@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 854Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 855turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
856linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
857magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
858@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 859@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
860If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
861linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
862constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
863
62bf86b4
HPN
864When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
865partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
866relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
867example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
868with input files in other formats at all.
869
252b5132
RH
870This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
871
872@kindex -R @var{file}
873@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
874@cindex symbol-only input
875@item -R @var{filename}
876@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
877Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
878relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
879to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
880programs. You may use this option more than once.
881
ff5dcc92 882For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 883followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 884the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
885
886@kindex -s
887@kindex --strip-all
888@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 889@item -s
252b5132
RH
890@itemx --strip-all
891Omit all symbol information from the output file.
892
893@kindex -S
894@kindex --strip-debug
895@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 896@item -S
252b5132
RH
897@itemx --strip-debug
898Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
899
900@kindex -t
901@kindex --trace
902@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 903@item -t
252b5132 904@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 905Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
906
907@kindex -T @var{script}
908@kindex --script=@var{script}
909@cindex script files
910@item -T @var{scriptfile}
911@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
912Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 913@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 914@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
915output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
916the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
917specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
918options accumulate.
252b5132 919
14be8564
L
920@kindex -dT @var{script}
921@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
922@cindex script files
923@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
924@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
925Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
926
927This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
928processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
929command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
930@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
931behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
932command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
933the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
934@samp{gcc}).
935
252b5132
RH
936@kindex -u @var{symbol}
937@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
938@cindex undefined symbol
939@item -u @var{symbol}
940@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
941Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
942symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
943modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
944different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
945option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
946
947@kindex -Ur
948@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 949@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
950For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
951@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 952turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
953@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
954It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
955with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
956be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
957@samp{-r} for the others.
958
577a0623
AM
959@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
962@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
963missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
964specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
965multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
966input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
967in a linker script.
a854a4a7 968
252b5132
RH
969@kindex -v
970@kindex -V
971@kindex --version
972@cindex version
973@item -v
974@itemx --version
975@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 976Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
977lists the supported emulations.
978
979@kindex -x
980@kindex --discard-all
981@cindex deleting local symbols
982@item -x
983@itemx --discard-all
984Delete all local symbols.
985
986@kindex -X
987@kindex --discard-locals
988@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 989@item -X
252b5132 990@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
991Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
992system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
993or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
994
995@kindex -y @var{symbol}
996@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997@cindex symbol tracing
998@item -y @var{symbol}
999@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1000Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1001option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1002to prepend an underscore.
1003
1004This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1005don't know where the reference is coming from.
1006
1007@kindex -Y @var{path}
1008@item -Y @var{path}
1009Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1010for Solaris compatibility.
1011
1012@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1013@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1014The recognized keywords are:
1015@table @samp
1016
1017@item combreloc
1018Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1019lookup caching possible.
1020
1021@item defs
560e09e9 1022Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1023shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1024
6aa29e7b
JJ
1025@item execstack
1026Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1027
b039ef04
L
1028@item global
1029This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1030the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1031of subsequently loaded libraries.
1032
cd6d6c15
NC
1033@item initfirst
1034This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1035It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1036before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1037the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1038the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1039objects.
1040
1041@item interpose
1042Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1043but the primary executable.
1044
5fa222e4
AM
1045@item lazy
1046When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1047dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1048the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1049Lazy binding is the default.
1050
cd6d6c15
NC
1051@item loadfltr
1052Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1053runtime.
1054
1055@item muldefs
1056Allows multiple definitions.
1057
1058@item nocombreloc
1059Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1060
1061@item nocopyreloc
1062Disables production of copy relocs.
1063
1064@item nodefaultlib
1065Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1066ignore any default library search paths.
1067
1068@item nodelete
1069Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1070
1071@item nodlopen
1072Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1073
1074@item nodump
1075Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1076
6aa29e7b
JJ
1077@item noexecstack
1078Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1079
1080@item norelro
1081Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1082
cd6d6c15
NC
1083@item now
1084When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1085dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1086when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1087deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1088first called.
1089
1090@item origin
1091Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1092
6aa29e7b
JJ
1093@item relro
1094Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1095
24718e3b
L
1096@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1097Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1098
1099@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1100Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1101
04c3a755
NS
1102@item stack-size=@var{value}
1103Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1104Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1105@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@end table
1108
ece2d90e 1109Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1110
1111@kindex -(
1112@cindex groups of archives
1113@item -( @var{archives} -)
1114@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1115The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1116either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1117
1118The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1119references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1120the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1121archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1122object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1123would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1124they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1125resolved.
1126
1127Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1128it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1129more archives.
1130
69da35b5
NC
1131@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1134@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1135Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1136recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1137and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1138the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1139behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1140so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1141restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1142
4a43e768
AM
1143@kindex --as-needed
1144@kindex --no-as-needed
1145@item --as-needed
1146@itemx --no-as-needed
1147This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1148on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1149the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1150on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1151needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1152emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1154the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1155non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1156Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1157the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1158needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1159from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1160
e56f61be
L
1161@kindex --add-needed
1162@kindex --no-add-needed
1163@item --add-needed
1164@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1165These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1166their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1167options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1168and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1169
252b5132
RH
1170@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1171@item -assert @var{keyword}
1172This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1173
1174@kindex -Bdynamic
1175@kindex -dy
1176@kindex -call_shared
1177@item -Bdynamic
1178@itemx -dy
1179@itemx -call_shared
1180Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1181for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1182default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1183for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1184multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1185@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1186
a1ab1d2a
UD
1187@kindex -Bgroup
1188@item -Bgroup
1189Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1190section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1191object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1192@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1193only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1194
252b5132
RH
1195@kindex -Bstatic
1196@kindex -dn
1197@kindex -non_shared
1198@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1199@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1200@itemx -dn
1201@itemx -non_shared
1202@itemx -static
1203Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1204platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1205variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1206may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1207library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1208option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1209option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1210shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1211references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1212libraries.
252b5132
RH
1213
1214@kindex -Bsymbolic
1215@item -Bsymbolic
1216When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1217definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1218for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1219within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1220platforms which support shared libraries.
1221
40b36307
L
1222@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1223@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1224When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1225symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1226This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1227libraries.
1228
55255dae
L
1229@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1231Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1232typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1233global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1234within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1235to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1236in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1237which support shared libraries.
1238
1239The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1240scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1241
40b36307
L
1242@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1243@item --dynamic-list-data
1244Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1245
1246@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1248Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1249is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1250
0b8a70d9
L
1251@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1253Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1254
252b5132
RH
1255@kindex --check-sections
1256@kindex --no-check-sections
1257@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1258@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1259Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1260been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1261perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1262suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1263allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1264restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1265Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1266force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1267option.
252b5132 1268
ddbb8a31
NC
1269@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1271@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1272@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1273This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1274by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1275command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1276output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1277input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1278specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1279follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1280behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1281
1282This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1283libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1284mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1285their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1286required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1287the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1288dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1289symbols.
1290
252b5132
RH
1291@cindex cross reference table
1292@kindex --cref
1293@item --cref
1294Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1295generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1296Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1297
1298The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1299easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1300sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1301symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1302definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1303where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1304symbol are listed.
252b5132 1305
4818e05f
AM
1306@cindex common allocation
1307@kindex --no-define-common
1308@item --no-define-common
1309This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1310The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1311@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1312
1313The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1314the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1315of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1316forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1317Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1318from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1319This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1320and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1321duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1322paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1323
252b5132 1324@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1325@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1326@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1327Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1328address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1329times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1330limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1331context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1332symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1333constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1334using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1335Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1336space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1337@var{expression}.
1338
1339@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1340@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1341@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1342@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1343@itemx --no-demangle
1344These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1345and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1346present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1347underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1348mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1349different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1350to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1351demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1352is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1353
1354@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1355@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1356@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1357@item -I@var{file}
1358@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1359Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1360generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1361linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1362doing.
1363
7ce691ae 1364@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1365@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1366@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1367@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1368Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1369with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1370
252b5132
RH
1371@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1372@item --force-exe-suffix
1373Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1374
1375If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1376@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1377the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1378option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1379Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1380it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1381
1382@kindex --gc-sections
1383@kindex --no-gc-sections
1384@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1385@item --gc-sections
1386@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1387Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1388targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1389performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1390@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1391
d5465ba2
AM
1392@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1393examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1394symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1395command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1396referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1397libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1398referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1399the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1400relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1401
ac69cbc6 1402This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1403@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1404specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1405a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1406
c17d87de
NC
1407@kindex --print-gc-sections
1408@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1409@cindex garbage collection
1410@item --print-gc-sections
1411@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1412List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1413printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1414collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1415default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1416be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1417line.
1418
30824704
RM
1419@kindex --print-output-format
1420@cindex output format
1421@item --print-output-format
1422Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1423other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1424in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1425
252b5132
RH
1426@cindex help
1427@cindex usage
1428@kindex --help
1429@item --help
1430Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1431
ea20a7da
CC
1432@kindex --target-help
1433@item --target-help
1434Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1435
2509a395
SL
1436@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1437@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1438Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1439@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1440
1441@cindex memory usage
1442@kindex --no-keep-memory
1443@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1444@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1445symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1446instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1447necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1448while linking a large executable.
1449
1450@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1452@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1453@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1454Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1455is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1456The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1457behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1458libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1459
aa713662
L
1460@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1461@kindex -z muldefs
1462@item --allow-multiple-definition
1463@itemx -z muldefs
1464Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1465report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1466first definition will be used.
1467
b79e8c78 1468@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1470@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1471@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1472Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1473This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1474determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1475shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1476how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1477
903249d7
NC
1478The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1479referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1480an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1481a shared library.
1482
1483The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1484libraries specified at link time are that:
1485
1486@itemize @bullet
1487@item
1488A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1489that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1490resolvable at load time.
1491@item
1492There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1493symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1494
1495The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1496select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1497architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1498appropriate memset function.
1499@end itemize
b79e8c78 1500
31941635
L
1501@kindex --no-undefined-version
1502@item --no-undefined-version
1503Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1504it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1505will be issued instead.
1506
3e3b46e5
PB
1507@kindex --default-symver
1508@item --default-symver
1509Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1510exported symbols.
1511
1512@kindex --default-imported-symver
1513@item --default-imported-symver
1514Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1515imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1516
252b5132
RH
1517@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1518@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1519Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1520files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1521been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1522This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1523errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1524have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1525inappropriate.
1526
fe7929ce
AM
1527@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1529Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1530library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1531
252b5132
RH
1532@kindex --no-whole-archive
1533@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1534Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1535archive files.
1536
1537@cindex output file after errors
1538@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1539@item --noinhibit-exec
1540Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1541Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1542errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1543when it issues any error whatsoever.
1544
0a9c1c8e
CD
1545@kindex -nostdlib
1546@item -nostdlib
1547Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1548command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1549(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1550
252b5132 1551@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1552@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1553@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1554@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1555file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1556@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1557object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1558object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1559should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1560usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1561name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1562list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1563command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1564this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1565@end ifclear
1566
36af4a4e
JJ
1567@kindex -pie
1568@kindex --pic-executable
1569@item -pie
1570@itemx --pic-executable
1571@cindex position independent executables
1572Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1573ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1574libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1575address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1576normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1577defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1578
252b5132
RH
1579@kindex -qmagic
1580@item -qmagic
1581This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1582
1583@kindex -Qy
1584@item -Qy
1585This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1586
1587@kindex --relax
1588@cindex synthesizing linker
1589@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1590@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1591@item --relax
28d5f677 1592@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1593An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1594@ifset GENERIC
1595This option is only supported on a few targets.
1596@end ifset
1597@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1598@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1599@end ifset
1600@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1601@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1602@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1603@ifset XTENSA
1604@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1605@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1606@ifset M68HC11
1607@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1608@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1609@ifset NIOSII
1610@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1611@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1612@ifset POWERPC
1613@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1614@end ifset
252b5132 1615
28d5f677
NC
1616On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1617global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1618addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1619synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1620instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1621
1622On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1623debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1624@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1625This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1626family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1627@end ifset
1628
1629@ifset GENERIC
1630On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1631but ignored.
1632@end ifset
1633
28d5f677
NC
1634On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1635@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1636
252b5132
RH
1637@cindex retaining specified symbols
1638@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1639@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1640@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1641@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1642Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1643discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1644symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1645@ifset GENERIC
1646(such as VxWorks)
1647@end ifset
1648where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1649run-time memory.
1650
1651@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1652or symbols needed for relocations.
1653
1654You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1655line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1658@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1659@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1660@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1661Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1662linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1663arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1664them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1665also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1666objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1667@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1668ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1669@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1670
ff5dcc92 1671The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1672SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1673@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1674runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1675options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1676gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1677file systems.
252b5132 1678
ff5dcc92 1679For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1680followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1681the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1682@end ifset
1683
1684@ifset GENERIC
1685@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1686@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1687@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1688When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1689happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1690of the input files.
1691
1692When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1693non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1694shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1695explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1696specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1697@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1698either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1699appearing multiple times.
1700
28c309a2
NC
1701This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1702that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1703is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1704runtime linker would do.
1705
252b5132 1706The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1707libraries:
252b5132
RH
1708@enumerate
1709@item
ff5dcc92 1710Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1711@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1712Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1713between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1714specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1715used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1716at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1717by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1718the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1719@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1720On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1721@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1722environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1723@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1724On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1725directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1726@item
a1b8d843 1727For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1728variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1729@item
ec4eb78a
L
1730For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1731@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1732libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1733@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1734@item
252b5132
RH
1735The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1736@item
1737For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1738exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1739@end enumerate
1740
1741If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1742warning and continue with the link.
1743@end ifset
1744
1745@kindex -shared
1746@kindex -Bshareable
1747@item -shared
1748@itemx -Bshareable
1749@cindex shared libraries
1750Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1751and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1752shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1753undefined symbols in the link.
1754
252b5132 1755@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1756@item --sort-common
1757@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1758@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1759This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1760ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1761sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1762eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1763between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1764specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=name
1767@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
2509a395
SL
1771@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1772@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1773This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1774patterns in the linker script.
1775
252b5132 1776@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1777@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1778Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1779each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1780size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1781
1782@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1783@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1784Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1785output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1786This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1787certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1788cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1789that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1790support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1791input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1792more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1793many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1794
1795@kindex --stats
1796@item --stats
1797Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1798as execution time and memory usage.
1799
2509a395 1800@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1801@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1802Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1803configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1804that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1805
252b5132
RH
1806@kindex --traditional-format
1807@cindex traditional format
1808@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1809For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1810the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1811use the traditional format instead.
1812
1813@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1814For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1815symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1816full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1817@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1818trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1819combine duplicate entries.
1820
2509a395
SL
1821@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1822@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1823Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1824address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1825times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1826line.
1827@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1828for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1829@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1830should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1831sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1832
2509a395
SL
1833@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1834@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1835@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1836@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1837@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1838@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1839@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1840Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1841@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1842
2509a395
SL
1843@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1844@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1845@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1846When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1847byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1848
9d5777a3
RM
1849@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1850@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1851@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1852When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1853the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1854text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1855
0d705e9f
AM
1856@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1857@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1858@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1859When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1860model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1861
560e09e9
NC
1862@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1863@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1864Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1865values for @samp{method}:
1866
1867@table @samp
1868@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1869Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1870
1871@item report-all
da8bce14 1872Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1873
1874@item ignore-in-object-files
1875Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1876ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1877
1878@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1879Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1880ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1881when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1882libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1883command line.
1884@end table
1885
1886The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1887by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1888
1889Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1890unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1891can change this to a warning.
1892
1715a13c
L
1893@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1894@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1895@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1896@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1897Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1898supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1899the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1900argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1901
1902@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1903@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1904@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1905Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1906used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1907about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1908is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1909see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1910use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1911symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1912@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1913
7ce691ae 1914@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1915@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1916@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1917@item --warn-common
1918Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1919a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1920but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1921you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1922Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1923warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1924
1925There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1926
1927@table @samp
1928@item int i = 1;
1929A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1930file.
1931
1932@item extern int i;
1933An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1934There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1935variable somewhere.
1936
1937@item int i;
1938A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1939variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1940The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1941single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1942size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1943a definition of the same variable.
1944@end table
1945
1946The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1947Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1948just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1949encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1950a common symbol.
1951
1952@enumerate
1953@item
1954Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1955definition for the symbol.
1956@smallexample
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1958 overridden by definition
1959@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1960@end smallexample
1961
1962@item
1963Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1964the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1965except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1966@smallexample
1967@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1968 overriding common
1969@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1970@end smallexample
1971
1972@item
1973Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1974@smallexample
1975@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1976 of `@var{symbol}'
1977@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1978@end smallexample
1979
1980@item
1981Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1982@smallexample
1983@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1984 overridden by larger common
1985@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1986@end smallexample
1987
1988@item
1989Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1990the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1991encountered in a different order.
1992@smallexample
1993@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1994 overriding smaller common
1995@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1996@end smallexample
1997@end enumerate
1998
1999@kindex --warn-constructors
2000@item --warn-constructors
2001Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2002object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2003detect the use of global constructors.
2004
2005@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2006@item --warn-multiple-gp
2007Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2008This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2009Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2010section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2011of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2012base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2013base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2014bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2015large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2016values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2017option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2018
2019@kindex --warn-once
2020@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2021@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2022@item --warn-once
2023Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2024which refers to it.
2025
2026@kindex --warn-section-align
2027@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2028@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2029@item --warn-section-align
2030Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2031alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2032The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2033is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2034the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2035
8fdd7217
NC
2036@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2037@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2038Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2039
a0c402a5
L
2040@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2041@item --warn-alternate-em
2042Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2043
560e09e9
NC
2044@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2045@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2046If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2047@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2048This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2049
2050@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2051@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2052This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2053it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2054
252b5132
RH
2055@kindex --whole-archive
2056@cindex including an entire archive
2057@item --whole-archive
2058For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2059@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2060in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2061files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2062library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2063library. This option may be used more than once.
2064
7ec229ce 2065Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2066about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2067Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2068list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2069your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2070
2509a395
SL
2071@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2072@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2073Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2074@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2075undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2076@var{symbol}.
2077
2078This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2079wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2080wishes to call the system function, it should call
2081@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2082
2083Here is a trivial example:
2084
2085@smallexample
2086void *
cc2f008e 2087__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2088@{
cc2f008e 2089 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2090 return __real_malloc (c);
2091@}
2092@end smallexample
2093
ff5dcc92 2094If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2095all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2096instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2097call the real @code{malloc} function.
2098
2099You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2100links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2101you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2102file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2103call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2104
6aa29e7b
JJ
2105@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2106@item --eh-frame-hdr
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2108@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2109
e41b3a13
JJ
2110@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2111@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2112Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2113generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2114if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2115
6c1439be
L
2116@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2117@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2118@item --enable-new-dtags
2119@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2120This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2121systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2122@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2123and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2124If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2125created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2126those options are only available for ELF systems.
2127
2d643429 2128@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2129@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2130Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2131close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2132time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2133increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2134value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2135
fdc90cb4
JJ
2136@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2137@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2138Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2139@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2140new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2141the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2142hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2143
35835446
JR
2144@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2145@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2146This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2147linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2148for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2149about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2150
4f9c04f7 2151Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21521021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2153run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2154has been used.
2155
2156The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2157enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2158
c0065db7
RM
2159@kindex --build-id
2160@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2161@item --build-id
2162@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2163Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2164or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2165unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2166@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2167@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2168@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2169the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2170string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2171@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2172is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2173
2174The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2175that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2176unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2177to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2178file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2179string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2180
2181Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2182@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2183@end table
2184
0285c67d
NC
2185@c man end
2186
36f63dca 2187@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2188
0285c67d
NC
2189@c man begin OPTIONS
2190
ff5dcc92 2191The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2192the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2193normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2194use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2195@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2196like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2197symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2198object file).
2199
2200In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2201support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2202PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2203values by either a space or an equals sign.
2204
ff5dcc92 2205@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2206
2207@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2208@item --add-stdcall-alias
2209If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2210as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2211[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2212
2213@kindex --base-file
2214@item --base-file @var{file}
2215Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2216addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2217@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2218[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@kindex --dll
2221@item --dll
2222Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2223@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2224file.
bb10df36 2225[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2226
88183869
DK
2227@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2228@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2229@item --enable-long-section-names
2230@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2231The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2232the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2233for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2234fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2235to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2236allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2237disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2238generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2239as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2240with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2241GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2242information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2243option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2244section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2245when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2246image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2247[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2248
252b5132
RH
2249@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2250@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2251@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2252@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2253If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2254do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2255only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2256resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2257undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2258@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2259to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2260warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2261import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2262to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2263feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2264@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2265mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2267
522f09cd
KT
2268@kindex --leading-underscore
2269@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2270@item --leading-underscore
2271@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2272For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2273in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2274disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2275
252b5132
RH
2276@cindex DLLs, creating
2277@kindex --export-all-symbols
2278@item --export-all-symbols
2279If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2280be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2281otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2282explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2283attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2284option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2285@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2286@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2287exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2288re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2289such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2290@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2291@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2292Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2293not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2294extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2295(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2296These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2297@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2298@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2299@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2300@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2301[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2302
2303@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2304@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2305Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2306exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2308
2927aaca
NC
2309@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2310@item --exclude-all-symbols
2311Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2313
252b5132
RH
2314@kindex --file-alignment
2315@item --file-alignment
2316Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2317file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2318512.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@cindex heap size
2322@kindex --heap
2323@item --heap @var{reserve}
2324@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2325Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2326to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2327committed.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@cindex image base
2331@kindex --image-base
2332@item --image-base @var{value}
2333Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2334the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2335is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2336your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2337other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2338for dlls.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@kindex --kill-at
2342@item --kill-at
2343If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2344symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2345[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2346
26d2d8a2
BF
2347@kindex --large-address-aware
2348@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2349If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2350header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2351greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2352or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2353section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2354[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2355
f69a2f97
NC
2356@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2357@item --disable-large-address-aware
2358Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2359This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2360driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2361addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2362[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2363
252b5132
RH
2364@kindex --major-image-version
2365@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2366Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --major-os-version
2370@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2371Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2372[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2373
2374@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2375@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2376Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2378
2379@kindex --minor-image-version
2380@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2381Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --minor-os-version
2385@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2386Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2388
2389@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2390@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2391Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2392[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2393
2394@cindex DEF files, creating
2395@cindex DLLs, creating
2396@kindex --output-def
2397@item --output-def @var{file}
2398The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2399file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2400(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2401library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2402automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2404
b044cda1
CW
2405@cindex DLLs, creating
2406@kindex --out-implib
2407@item --out-implib @var{file}
2408The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2409import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2410import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2411may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2412makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2413creation step.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2415
2416@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2417@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2418@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2419Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2420@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2421By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2422for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2423execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2424[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2425
2426@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2427@item --disable-auto-image-base
2428Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2429user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2430default.
bb10df36 2431[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2432
2433@cindex DLLs, linking to
2434@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2435@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2436When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2437search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2438@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2439between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2440uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2441@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2442[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2443
2444@kindex --enable-auto-import
2445@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2446Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2447DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2448building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2449'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2450to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2451specification published by Microsoft.
2452
e2a83dd0
NC
2453Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2454data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2455placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2456around a problem with consts that is described here:
2457http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2458
4d8907ac
DS
2459Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2460see this message:
0d888aac 2461
ece2d90e 2462"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2463documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2464
ece2d90e
NC
2465This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2466ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2467allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2468fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2469constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2470multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2471this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2472of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2473the warning, and exit.
2474
2475There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2476data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2477
2fa9fc65
NC
2478One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2479of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2480this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2481
c0065db7
RM
2482A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2483that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2484there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2485a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2486
2487@example
2488extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2489extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2490 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2491@end example
2492
2493or
2494
2495@example
2496extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2497extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2498 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2499@end example
2500
c0065db7 2501For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2502is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2503
2504@example
2505extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2506extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2507 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2508@end example
2509
c406afaf
NC
2510or
2511
2512@example
2513extern long long extern_ll;
2514extern_ll -->
2515 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2516@end example
2517
2fa9fc65 2518A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2519'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2520@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2521requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2522building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2523merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2524between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2525constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2526
2527Original:
2528@example
2529--foo.h
2530extern int arr[];
2531--foo.c
2532#include "foo.h"
2533void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2534 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2535@}
2536@end example
2537
2538Solution 1:
2539@example
2540--foo.h
2541extern int arr[];
2542--foo.c
2543#include "foo.h"
2544void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2545 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2546 volatile int *parr = arr;
2547 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2548@}
2549@end example
2550
2551Solution 2:
2552@example
2553--foo.h
2554/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2555#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2556 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2557#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2558#else
2559#define FOO_IMPORT
2560#endif
2561extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2562--foo.c
2563#include "foo.h"
2564void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2565 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2566@}
2567@end example
2568
c0065db7 2569A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2570library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2571for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2572functions).
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2574
2575@kindex --disable-auto-import
2576@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2577Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2578@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2580
2fa9fc65
NC
2581@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2582@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2583If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2584that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2585a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2586environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2588
2589@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2590@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2591Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2592DLLs.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2594
b044cda1
CW
2595@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2596@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2597Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2599
252b5132
RH
2600@kindex --section-alignment
2601@item --section-alignment
2602Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2603addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2605
2606@cindex stack size
2607@kindex --stack
2608@item --stack @var{reserve}
2609@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2610Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2611to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2612committed.
bb10df36 2613[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2614
2615@kindex --subsystem
2616@item --subsystem @var{which}
2617@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2618@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2619Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2620legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2621@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2622the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2623@var{which}.
bb10df36 2624[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2625
2f563b51
DK
2626The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2627of the PE file header:
2628[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2629
2630@kindex --dynamicbase
2631@item --dynamicbase
2632The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2633randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2634Vista for i386 PE targets.
2635
2636@kindex --forceinteg
2637@item --forceinteg
2638Code integrity checks are enforced.
2639
2640@kindex --nxcompat
2641@item --nxcompat
2642The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2643This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2644
2645@kindex --no-isolation
2646@item --no-isolation
2647Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2648
2649@kindex --no-seh
2650@item --no-seh
2651The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2652this image.
2653
2654@kindex --no-bind
2655@item --no-bind
2656Do not bind this image.
2657
2658@kindex --wdmdriver
2659@item --wdmdriver
2660The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2661
2f563b51
DK
2662@kindex --tsaware
2663@item --tsaware
2664The image is Terminal Server aware.
2665
0cb112f7
CF
2666@kindex --insert-timestamp
2667@item --insert-timestamp
2668Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2669of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2670invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
252b5132
RH
2671@end table
2672
0285c67d
NC
2673@c man end
2674
ac145307
BS
2675@ifset C6X
2676@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2677
2678@c man begin OPTIONS
2679
2680The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2681libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2682all executables use an index of 0.
2683
2684@table @gcctabopt
2685
2686@kindex --dsbt-size
2687@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2688This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2689or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2690entries.
2691
2692@kindex --dsbt-index
2693@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2694This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2695to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2696executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2697@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2698
fbd9ad90
PB
2699@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2700The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2701exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2702
ac145307
BS
2703@end table
2704
2705@c man end
2706@end ifset
2707
93fd0973
SC
2708@ifset M68HC11
2709@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2710
2711@c man begin OPTIONS
2712
2713The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2714memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2715
2716@table @gcctabopt
2717
2718@kindex --no-trampoline
2719@item --no-trampoline
2720This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2721is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2722instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2723
2724@kindex --bank-window
2725@item --bank-window @var{name}
2726This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2727the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2728The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2729paging and addresses within the memory window.
2730
2731@end table
2732
2733@c man end
2734@end ifset
2735
7fb9f789
NC
2736@ifset M68K
2737@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2738
2739@c man begin OPTIONS
2740
2741The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2742when linking for 68K targets.
2743
2744@table @gcctabopt
2745
2746@kindex --got
2747@item --got=@var{type}
2748This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2749@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2750@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2751Info entry for @file{ld}.
2752
2753@end table
2754
2755@c man end
2756@end ifset
2757
833794fc
MR
2758@ifset MIPS
2759@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2760
2761@c man begin OPTIONS
2762
2763The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2764generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2765
2766@table @gcctabopt
2767
2768@kindex --insn32
2769@item --insn32
2770@kindex --no-insn32
2771@itemx --no-insn32
2772These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2773generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2774or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
277532-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2776used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2777possible.
2778
2779@end table
2780
2781@c man end
2782@end ifset
2783
252b5132
RH
2784@ifset UsesEnvVars
2785@node Environment
2786@section Environment Variables
2787
0285c67d
NC
2788@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2789
560e09e9 2790You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2791@ifclear SingleFormat
2792@code{GNUTARGET},
2793@end ifclear
2794@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2795
36f63dca 2796@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2797@kindex GNUTARGET
2798@cindex default input format
2799@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2800use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2801of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2802@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2803of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2804attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2805this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2806there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2807object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2808BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2809in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2810@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2811
2812@kindex LDEMULATION
2813@cindex default emulation
2814@cindex emulation, default
2815@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2816@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2817behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2818available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2819the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2820variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2821linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2822
2823@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2824@cindex demangling, default
2825Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2826@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2827default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2828a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2829may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2830options.
2831
0285c67d
NC
2832@c man end
2833@end ifset
2834
252b5132
RH
2835@node Scripts
2836@chapter Linker Scripts
2837
2838@cindex scripts
2839@cindex linker scripts
2840@cindex command files
2841Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2842written in the linker command language.
2843
2844The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2845the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2846the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2847more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2848direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2849described below.
2850
2851The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2852yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2853linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2854to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2855such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2856
2857You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2858line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2859default linker script.
2860
2861You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2862to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2863Linker Scripts}.
2864
2865@menu
2866* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2867* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2868* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2869* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2870* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2871* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2872* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2873* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2874* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2875* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2876* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2877@end menu
2878
2879@node Basic Script Concepts
2880@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2881@cindex linker script concepts
2882We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2883describe the linker script language.
2884
2885The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2886file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2887@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2888The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2889purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2890among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2891section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2892in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2893
2894Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2895also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2896contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2897the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2898A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2899area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2900loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2901which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2902of debugging information.
2903
2904Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2905first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2906the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2907@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2908section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2909same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2910is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2911(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2912based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2913RAM address would be the VMA.
2914
2915You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2916program with the @samp{-h} option.
2917
2918Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2919@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2920has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2921information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2922will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2923static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2924referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2925
2926You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2927program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2928option.
2929
2930@node Script Format
2931@section Linker Script Format
2932@cindex linker script format
2933Linker scripts are text files.
2934
2935You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2936either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2937symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2938generally ignored.
2939
2940Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2941If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2942otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2943double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2944file name.
2945
2946You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2947@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2948to whitespace.
2949
2950@node Simple Example
2951@section Simple Linker Script Example
2952@cindex linker script example
2953@cindex example of linker script
2954Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2955
2956The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2957@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2958memory layout of the output file.
2959
2960The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2961describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2962code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2963@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2964Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2965your input files.
2966
2967For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29680x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2969linker script which will do that:
2970@smallexample
2971SECTIONS
2972@{
2973 . = 0x10000;
2974 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2975 . = 0x8000000;
2976 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2977 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2978@}
2979@end smallexample
2980
2981You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2982followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2983descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2984
252b5132
RH
2985The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2986sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2987counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2988other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2989current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2990incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2991@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2992
2993The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2994required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2995after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2996which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2997wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2998means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2999
3000Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3001@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3002@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3003
3004The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3005the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3006at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3007output section, the value of the location counter will be
3008@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3009effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3010immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3011
3012The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3013alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3014example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3015sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3016may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3017sections.
3018
3019That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3020
3021@node Simple Commands
3022@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3023@cindex linker script simple commands
3024In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3025
3026@menu
3027* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3028* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3029@ifclear SingleFormat
3030* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3031@end ifclear
3032
4a93e180 3033* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3034* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3035@end menu
3036
3037@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3038@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3039@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3040@cindex start of execution
3041@cindex first instruction
3042@cindex entry point
3043The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3044point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3045entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3046@smallexample
3047ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3048@end smallexample
3049
3050There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3051entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3052stopping when one of them succeeds:
3053@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3054@item
252b5132 3055the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3056@item
252b5132 3057the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3058@item
3ab904c4
NC
3059the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3060targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3061check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3062@item
252b5132 3063the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3064@item
252b5132
RH
3065The address @code{0}.
3066@end itemize
3067
3068@node File Commands
36f63dca 3069@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3070@cindex linker script file commands
3071Several linker script commands deal with files.
3072
3073@table @code
3074@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3075@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3076@cindex including a linker script
3077Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3078be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3079with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
308010 levels deep.
3081
4006703d
NS
3082You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3083@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3084
252b5132
RH
3085@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3086@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3087@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3088@cindex input files in linker scripts
3089@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3090@cindex linker script input object files
3091The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3092in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3093
3094For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3095a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3096then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3097
3098In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3099script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3100
e3f2db7f
AO
3101In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3102with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3103located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3104for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3105open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3106linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3107description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3108
ff5dcc92 3109If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3110name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3111@samp{-l}.
3112
3113When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3114files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3115script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3116
3117@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3118@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3119@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3120@cindex grouping input files
3121The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3122files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3123new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3124in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3125
b717d30e
JJ
3126@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3127@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3128@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3129This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3130commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3131as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3132with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3133when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3134@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3135and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3136setting afterwards.
3137
252b5132
RH
3138@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3139@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3140@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3141The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3142@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3143@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3144Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3145precedence.
3146
3147You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3148output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3149
3150@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3151@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3152@cindex library search path in linker script
3153@cindex archive search path in linker script
3154@cindex search path in linker script
3155The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3156@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3157@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3158on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3159are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3160the command line option are searched first.
3161
3162@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3163@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3164@cindex first input file
3165The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3166that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3167though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3168when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3169first file.
3170@end table
3171
3172@ifclear SingleFormat
3173@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3174@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3175A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3176
3177@table @code
3178@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3179@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3180@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3181@cindex output file format in linker script
3182The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3183output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3184exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3185(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3186line option takes precedence.
3187
3188You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3189formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3190This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3191desired endianness.
3192
3193If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3194will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3195output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3196used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3197
3198For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3199command:
3200@smallexample
3201OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3202@end smallexample
3203This says that the default format for the output file is
3204@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3205option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3206format.
3207
3208@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3209@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3210@cindex input file format in linker script
3211The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3212files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3213This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3214(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3215is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3216command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3217@end table
3218@end ifclear
3219
4a93e180
NC
3220@node REGION_ALIAS
3221@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3222@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3223@cindex region alias
3224@cindex region names
3225
3226Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3227@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3228
3229@smallexample
3230REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3231@end smallexample
3232
3233The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3234memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3235to memory regions. An example follows.
3236
3237Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3238memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3239that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3240non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3241access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3242read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3243sections:
3244
3245@itemize @bullet
3246@item
3247@code{.text} program code;
3248@item
3249@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3250@item
3251@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3252@item
3253@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3254@end itemize
3255
3256The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3257part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3258output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3259systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3260@code{C}:
3261@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3262@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3263@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3264@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3265@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3266@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3267@end multitable
3268The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3269loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3270the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3271the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3272
3273The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3274includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3275memory layout:
3276@smallexample
3277INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3278
3279SECTIONS
3280 @{
3281 .text :
3282 @{
3283 *(.text)
3284 @} > REGION_TEXT
3285 .rodata :
3286 @{
3287 *(.rodata)
3288 rodata_end = .;
3289 @} > REGION_RODATA
3290 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3291 @{
3292 data_start = .;
3293 *(.data)
3294 @} > REGION_DATA
3295 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3296 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3297 .bss :
3298 @{
3299 *(.bss)
3300 @} > REGION_BSS
3301 @}
3302@end smallexample
3303
3304Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3305regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3306variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3307@table @code
3308@item A
3309Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3310@smallexample
3311MEMORY
3312 @{
3313 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3314 @}
3315
3316REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3317REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3318REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3319REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3320@end smallexample
3321@item B
3322Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3323into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3324@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3325@smallexample
3326MEMORY
3327 @{
3328 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3329 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3330 @}
3331
3332REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3333REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3334REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3335REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3336@end smallexample
3337@item C
3338Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3339@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3340initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3341system start into the @code{RAM}.
3342@smallexample
3343MEMORY
3344 @{
3345 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3346 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3347 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3348 @}
3349
3350REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3351REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3352REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3353REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3354@end smallexample
3355@end table
3356
3357It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3358@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3359necessary:
3360@smallexample
3361#include <string.h>
3362
3363extern char data_start [];
3364extern char data_size [];
3365extern char data_load_start [];
3366
3367void copy_data(void)
3368@{
3369 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3370 @{
3371 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3372 @}
3373@}
3374@end smallexample
3375
252b5132 3376@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3377@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3378There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3379
3380@table @code
3381@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3382@kindex ASSERT
3383@cindex assertion in linker script
3384Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3385with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3386
3387@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3388@kindex EXTERN
3389@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3390Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3391symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3392modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3393each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3394command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3395
3396@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3397@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3398@cindex common allocation in linker script
3399This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3400to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3401output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3402
4818e05f
AM
3403@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3404@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3405@cindex common allocation in linker script
3406This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3407command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3408to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3409
53d25da6
AM
3410@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3411@kindex INSERT
3412@cindex insert user script into default script
3413This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3414augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3415inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3416@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3417default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3418sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3419linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3420insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3421linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3422default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3423of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3424to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3425is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3426
3427@smallexample
3428SECTIONS
3429@{
3430 OVERLAY :
3431 @{
3432 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3433 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3434 @}
3435@}
3436INSERT AFTER .text;
3437@end smallexample
3438
252b5132
RH
3439@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3440@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3441@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3442This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3443references among certain output sections.
3444
3445In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3446using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3447will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3448errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3449a function defined in the other section.
3450
3451The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3452@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3453an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3454@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3455names.
3456
3457@ifclear SingleFormat
3458@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3459@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3460@cindex machine architecture
3461@cindex architecture
3462Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3463of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3464architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3465the @samp{-f} option.
3466@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3467
3468@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3469@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3470This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3471@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3472in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3473@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3474@end table
3475
3476@node Assignments
3477@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3478@cindex assignment in scripts
3479@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3480@cindex variables, defining
3481You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3482the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3483
3484@menu
3485* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3486* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3487* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3488* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3489* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3490@end menu
3491
3492@node Simple Assignments
3493@subsection Simple Assignments
3494
3495You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3496
3497@table @code
3498@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3499@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3500@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3501@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3502@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3503@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3504@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3505@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3506@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3507@end table
3508
3509The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3510@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3511defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3512
3513The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3514may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3515
3516The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3517
3518Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3519
3520You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3521statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3522section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3523
3524The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3525expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3526
3527Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3528assignments may be used:
3529
3530@smallexample
3531floating_point = 0;
3532SECTIONS
3533@{
3534 .text :
3535 @{
3536 *(.text)
3537 _etext = .;
3538 @}
156e34dd 3539 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3540 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3541@}
3542@end smallexample
3543@noindent
3544In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3545zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3546the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3547defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3548upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3549
eb8476a6
MR
3550@node HIDDEN
3551@subsection HIDDEN
3552@cindex HIDDEN
3553For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3554exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3555
3556Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3557@code{HIDDEN}:
3558
3559@smallexample
3560HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3561SECTIONS
3562@{
3563 .text :
3564 @{
3565 *(.text)
3566 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3567 @}
3568 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3569 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3570@}
3571@end smallexample
3572@noindent
3573In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3574
252b5132
RH
3575@node PROVIDE
3576@subsection PROVIDE
3577@cindex PROVIDE
3578In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3579only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3580the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3581@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3582@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3583@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3584@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3585@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3586
3587Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3588@smallexample
3589SECTIONS
3590@{
3591 .text :
3592 @{
3593 *(.text)
3594 _etext = .;
3595 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3596 @}
3597@}
3598@end smallexample
3599
3600In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3601underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3602the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3603underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3604If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3605linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3606
7af8e998
L
3607@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3608@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3609@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3610Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3611hidden and won't be exported.
3612
73ae6183
NC
3613@node Source Code Reference
3614@subsection Source Code Reference
3615
3616Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3617intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3618a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3619symbol that does not have a value.
3620
3621Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3622transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3623stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3624prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3625mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3626of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3627variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3628linker script variable might be referred to as:
3629
3630@smallexample
3631 extern int foo;
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3635
3636@smallexample
3637 _foo = 1000;
3638@end smallexample
3639
3640In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3641transformation has taken place.
3642
3643When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3644things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3645in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3646second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3647table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3648contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3649value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3650
3651@smallexample
3652 int foo = 1000;
3653@end smallexample
3654
10bf6894 3655creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3656holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3657number 1000 is initially stored.
3658
3659When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3660first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3661memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3662So:
3663
3664@smallexample
3665 foo = 1;
3666@end smallexample
3667
3668looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3669associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3670address. Whereas:
3671
3672@smallexample
3673 int * a = & foo;
3674@end smallexample
3675
10bf6894 3676looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3677and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3678the variable @samp{a}.
3679
3680Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3681the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3682an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3683
3684@smallexample
3685 foo = 1000;
3686@end smallexample
3687
3688creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3689the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3690address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3691linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3692access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3693
3694Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3695you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3696use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3697section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3698linker script contains these declarations:
3699
3700@smallexample
3701@group
3702 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3703 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3704 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3705@end group
3706@end smallexample
3707
3708Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3709
3710@smallexample
3711@group
3712 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3713
73ae6183
NC
3714 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3715@end group
3716@end smallexample
3717
3718Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3719
252b5132 3720@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3721@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3722@kindex SECTIONS
3723The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3724into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3725
3726The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3727@smallexample
3728SECTIONS
3729@{
3730 @var{sections-command}
3731 @var{sections-command}
3732 @dots{}
3733@}
3734@end smallexample
3735
3736Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3737
3738@itemize @bullet
3739@item
3740an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3741@item
3742a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3743@item
3744an output section description
3745@item
3746an overlay description
3747@end itemize
3748
3749The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3750@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3751those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3752understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3753the layout of the output file.
3754
3755Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3756below.
3757
3758If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3759linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3760section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3761input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3762example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3763in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3764
3765@menu
3766* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3767* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3768* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3769* Input Section:: Input section description
3770* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3771* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3772* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3773* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3774* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3775@end menu
3776
3777@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3778@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3779The full description of an output section looks like this:
3780@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3781@group
7e7d5768 3782@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3783 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3784 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3785 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3786 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3787 @{
3788 @var{output-section-command}
3789 @var{output-section-command}
3790 @dots{}
abc9061b 3791 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3792@end group
3793@end smallexample
3794
3795Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3796
3797The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3798name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3799The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3800the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3801The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3802
3803Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3804
3805@itemize @bullet
3806@item
3807a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3808@item
3809an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3810@item
3811data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3812@item
3813a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3814@end itemize
3815
3816@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3817@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3818@cindex name, section
3819@cindex section name
3820The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3821meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3822support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3823must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3824example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3825output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3826names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3827quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3828characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3829commas must be quoted.
3830
3831The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3832Discarding}.
3833
3834@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3835@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3836@cindex address, section
3837@cindex section address
3838The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3839address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3840is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3841
3842If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3843section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3844to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3845alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3846contained within the output section.
3847
3848The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3849
3850@itemize @bullet
3851@item
3852If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3853is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3854in that region.
3855
3856@item
3857If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3858regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3859section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3860be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3861
3862@item
3863If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3864the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3865counter.
3866@end itemize
3867
3868@noindent
3869For example:
3870
252b5132
RH
3871@smallexample
3872.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3873@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3874
252b5132
RH
3875@noindent
3876and
ea5cae92 3877
252b5132
RH
3878@smallexample
3879.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3880@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3881
252b5132
RH
3882@noindent
3883are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3884@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3885counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3886counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3887input sections.
252b5132
RH
3888
3889The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3890For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3891so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3892do something like this:
3893@smallexample
3894.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3895@end smallexample
3896@noindent
3897This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3898aligned upward to the specified value.
3899
3900Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3901location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3902sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3903
3904@node Input Section
36f63dca 3905@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3906@cindex input sections
3907@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3908The most common output section command is an input section description.
3909
3910The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3911You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3912in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3913map the input files into your memory layout.
3914
3915@menu
3916* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3917* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3918* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3919* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3920* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3921@end menu
3922
3923@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3924@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3925@cindex input section basics
3926An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3927by a list of section names in parentheses.
3928
3929The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3930describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3931
3932The most common input section description is to include all input
3933sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3934include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3935@smallexample
3936*(.text)
3937@end smallexample
3938@noindent
18625d54
CM
3939Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3940of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3941match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3942example:
252b5132 3943@smallexample
b4346c09 3944*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3945@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3946will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3947@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3948
3949There are two ways to include more than one section:
3950@smallexample
3951*(.text .rdata)
3952*(.text) *(.rdata)
3953@end smallexample
3954@noindent
3955The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3956@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3957first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3958they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3959@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3960@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3961
3962You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3963You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3964needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3965@smallexample
3966data.o(.data)
3967@end smallexample
3968
ae17ab41
CM
3969To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3970of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3971
3972Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3973
3974@smallexample
3975@group
3976SECTIONS @{
3977 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3978 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3979@}
3980@end group
3981@end smallexample
3982
3983In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3984input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3985@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3986@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3987whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3988
967928e9
AM
3989You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3990matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3991with no whitespace around the colon.
3992
3993@table @samp
3994@item archive:file
3995matches file within archive
3996@item archive:
3997matches the whole archive
3998@item :file
3999matches file but not one in an archive
4000@end table
4001
4002Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4003wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4004single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4005@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4006within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4007also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4008other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4009from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4010command.
4011
252b5132
RH
4012If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4013the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4014commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4015@smallexample
4016data.o
4017@end smallexample
4018
967928e9
AM
4019When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4020and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4021characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4022name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4023did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4024though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4025@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4026the archive search path.
4027
4028@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4029@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4030@cindex input section wildcards
4031@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4032@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4033@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4034In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4035name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4036
4037The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4038pattern for the file name.
4039
4040The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4041
4042@table @samp
4043@item *
4044matches any number of characters
4045@item ?
4046matches any single character
4047@item [@var{chars}]
4048matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4049character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4050@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4051@item \
4052quotes the following character
4053@end table
4054
4055When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4056will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4057Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4058exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4059@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4060a @samp{/} character.
4061
4062File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4063specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4064does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4065
4066If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4067appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4068will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4069sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4070@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4071@smallexample
4072.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4073.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4074@end smallexample
4075
bcaa7b3e 4076@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4077Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4078in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4079this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4080pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4081@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4082into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4083
bcaa7b3e
L
4084@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4085@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4086difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4087descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4088Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4089reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4090
02ecc8e9
L
4091@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4092@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4093difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4094ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4095encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4096
bcaa7b3e
L
4097@cindex SORT
4098@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4099
4100When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4101can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4102
4103@enumerate
4104@item
4105@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4106It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4107sections have the same name.
4108@item
4109@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4110It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4111sections have the same alignment.
4112@item
c0065db7 4113@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4114treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4115@item
4116@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4117is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4118@item
4119All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4120@end enumerate
4121
4122When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4123section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4124takes precedence over the command line option.
4125
4126If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4127command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4128treated as nested sorting command.
4129
4130@enumerate
4131@item
4132@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4133@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4134@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4135@item
4136@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4137@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4138@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4139@end enumerate
4140
4141If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4142command line option will be ignored.
4143
eda680f8
L
4144@cindex SORT_NONE
4145@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4146section sorting option.
4147
252b5132
RH
4148If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4149@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4150precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4151
4152This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4153files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4154sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4155The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4156with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4157linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4158@smallexample
4159@group
4160SECTIONS @{
4161 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4162 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4163 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4164 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4165@}
4166@end group
4167@end smallexample
4168
4169@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4170@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4171@cindex common symbol placement
4172@cindex uninitialized data placement
4173A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4174file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4175linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4176named @samp{COMMON}.
4177
4178You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4179other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4180particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4181input files are placed in another section.
4182
4183In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4184@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4185@smallexample
4186.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4187@end smallexample
4188
4189@cindex scommon section
4190@cindex small common symbols
4191Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4192example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4193symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4194different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4195the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4196symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4197to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4198locations.
4199
4200@cindex [COMMON]
4201You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4202notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4203@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4204
4205@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4206@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4207@cindex KEEP
4208@cindex garbage collection
4209When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4210it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4211This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4212with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4213@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4214
4215@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4216@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4217The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4218to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4219start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4220@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4221follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4222@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4223@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4224All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4225files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4226
4227@smallexample
4228@group
4229SECTIONS @{
4230 outputa 0x10000 :
4231 @{
4232 all.o
4233 foo.o (.input1)
4234 @}
36f63dca
NC
4235@end group
4236@group
252b5132
RH
4237 outputb :
4238 @{
4239 foo.o (.input2)
4240 foo1.o (.input1)
4241 @}
36f63dca
NC
4242@end group
4243@group
252b5132
RH
4244 outputc :
4245 @{
4246 *(.input1)
4247 *(.input2)
4248 @}
4249@}
4250@end group
a1ab1d2a 4251@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4252
4253@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4254@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4255@cindex data
4256@cindex section data
4257@cindex output section data
4258@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4259@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4260@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4261@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4262@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4263You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4264@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4265an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4266parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4267value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4268counter.
4269
4270The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4271store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4272bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4273stored.
4274
4275For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4276of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4277@smallexample
4278BYTE(1)
4279LONG(addr)
4280@end smallexample
4281
4282When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4283same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4284target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4285@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4286@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4287
4288If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4289which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4290When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4291true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4292endianness of the first input object file.
4293
36f63dca 4294Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4295between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4296@smallexample
4297SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4298@end smallexample
4299whereas this will work:
4300@smallexample
4301SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4302@end smallexample
4303
252b5132
RH
4304@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4305@cindex holes, filling
4306@cindex unspecified memory
4307You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4308current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4309otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4310gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4311with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4312necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4313point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4314than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4315different parts of an output section.
4316
4317This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4318value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4319@smallexample
563e308f 4320FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4321@end smallexample
4322
4323The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4324section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4325part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4326entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4327precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4328expression.
252b5132
RH
4329
4330@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4331@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4332There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4333commands.
4334
4335@table @code
4336@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4337@cindex input filename symbols
4338@cindex filename symbols
4339@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4340The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4341The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4342file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4343the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4344
4345This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4346normally used for any other object file format.
4347
4348@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4349@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4350@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4351@item CONSTRUCTORS
4352When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4353unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4354destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4355arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4356automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4357For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4358linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4359@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4360ignored for other object file formats.
4361
4362The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4363constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4364Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4365the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4366first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4367of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4368compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4369formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4370@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4371the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4372destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4373@code{exit}.
4374
4375For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4376arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4377addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4378and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4379linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4380runtime code expects to see.
4381
4382@smallexample
4383 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4384 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4385 *(.ctors)
4386 LONG(0)
4387 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4388 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4389 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4390 *(.dtors)
4391 LONG(0)
4392 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4393@end smallexample
4394
4395If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4396which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4397are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4398are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4399command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4400@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4401@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4402@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4403
4404Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4405and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4406need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4407scripts.
4408
4409@end table
4410
4411@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4412@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4413@cindex discarding sections
4414@cindex sections, discarding
4415@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4416The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4417This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4418may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4419@smallexample
49c13adb 4420.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4421@end smallexample
4422@noindent
4423will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4424@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4425sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4426space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4427too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4428space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4429@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4430@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4431This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4432
a0976ea4 4433The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4434on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4435symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4436the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4437section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4438
4439@cindex /DISCARD/
4440The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4441input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4442section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4443
4444@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4445@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4446@cindex output section attributes
4447We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4448like this:
0c71d759 4449
252b5132 4450@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4451@group
7e7d5768 4452@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4453 [AT(@var{lma})]
4454 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4455 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4456 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4457 @{
4458 @var{output-section-command}
4459 @var{output-section-command}
4460 @dots{}
562d3460 4461 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4462@end group
4463@end smallexample
0c71d759 4464
252b5132
RH
4465We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4466@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4467remaining section attributes.
4468
a1ab1d2a 4469@menu
252b5132
RH
4470* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4471* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4472* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4473* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4474* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4475* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4476* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4477* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4478@end menu
4479
4480@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4481@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4482Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4483parentheses. The following types are defined:
4484
4485@table @code
4486@item NOLOAD
4487The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4488loaded into memory when the program is run.
4489@item DSECT
4490@itemx COPY
4491@itemx INFO
4492@itemx OVERLAY
4493These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4494rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4495marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4496section when the program is run.
4497@end table
4498
4499@kindex NOLOAD
4500@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4501@cindex loading, preventing
4502The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4503the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4504the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4505@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4506need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4507@smallexample
4508@group
4509SECTIONS @{
4510 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4511 @dots{}
4512@}
4513@end group
4514@end smallexample
4515
4516@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4517@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4518@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4519@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4520@cindex load address
4521@cindex section load address
4522Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4523@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4524@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4525specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4526address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4527
ea5cae92
NC
4528The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4529specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4530takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4531load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4532region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4533
4534If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4535section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4536load address:
4537
4538@itemize @bullet
4539@item
4540If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4541the LMA address as well.
4542
4543@item
4544If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4545
4546@item
4547Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4548with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4549section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4550VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4551the last section in the located region.
4552
4553@item
4554If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4555that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4556
4557@item
4558If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4559section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4560@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4561
4562@cindex ROM initialized data
4563@cindex initialized data in ROM
4564This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4565example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4566called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4567@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4568even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4569uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4570defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4571counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4572
4573@smallexample
4574@group
4575SECTIONS
4576 @{
4577 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4578 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4579 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4580 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4581 .bss 0x3000 :
4582 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4583@}
4584@end group
4585@end smallexample
4586
4587The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4588this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4589the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4590how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4591script.
4592
4593@smallexample
4594@group
4595extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4596char *src = &_etext;
4597char *dst = &_data;
4598
ea5cae92
NC
4599/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4600while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4601 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4602
ea5cae92 4603/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4604for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4605 *dst = 0;
4606@end group
4607@end smallexample
4608
bbf115d3
L
4609@node Forced Output Alignment
4610@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4611@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4612@cindex forcing output section alignment
4613@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4614You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4615alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4616intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4617
7e7d5768
AM
4618@node Forced Input Alignment
4619@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4620@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4621@cindex forcing input section alignment
4622@cindex input section alignment
4623You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4624SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4625sections, whether larger or smaller.
4626
0c71d759
NC
4627@node Output Section Constraint
4628@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4629@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4630@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4631@cindex constraints on output sections
4632You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4633of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4634read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4635@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4636
252b5132 4637@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4638@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4639@kindex >@var{region}
4640@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4641@cindex memory regions and sections
4642You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4643using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4644
4645Here is a simple example:
4646@smallexample
4647@group
4648MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4649SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4650@end group
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4654@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4655@kindex :@var{phdr}
4656@cindex section, assigning to program header
4657@cindex program headers and sections
4658You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4659using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4660one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4661assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4662@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4663linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4664
4665Here is a simple example:
4666@smallexample
4667@group
4668PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4669SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4670@end group
4671@end smallexample
4672
4673@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4674@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4675@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4676@cindex section fill pattern
4677@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4678You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4679@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4680(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4681within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4682alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4683necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4684of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4685an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4686fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4687other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4688pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4689expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4690
4691You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4692output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4693
4694Here is a simple example:
4695@smallexample
4696@group
563e308f 4697SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4698@end group
4699@end smallexample
4700
4701@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4702@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4703@kindex OVERLAY
4704@cindex overlays
4705An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4706are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4707the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4708copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4709required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4710can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4711than another.
4712
4713Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4714@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4715output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4716command is as follows:
4717@smallexample
4718@group
4719OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4720 @{
4721 @var{secname1}
4722 @{
4723 @var{output-section-command}
4724 @var{output-section-command}
4725 @dots{}
4726 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4727 @var{secname2}
4728 @{
4729 @var{output-section-command}
4730 @var{output-section-command}
4731 @dots{}
4732 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4733 @dots{}
abc9061b 4734 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4735@end group
4736@end smallexample
4737
4738Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4739section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4740section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4741those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4742except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4743sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4744
abc9061b
CC
4745The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4746the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4747
252b5132
RH
4748The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4749addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4750memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4751whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4752and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4753and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4754
56dd11f0
NC
4755If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4756references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4757the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4758sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4759@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4760
4761For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4762provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4763defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4764@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4765the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4766within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4767symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4768
4769At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4770the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4771
4772Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4773@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4774@smallexample
4775@group
4776 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4777 @{
4778 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4779 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4780 @}
4781@end group
4782@end smallexample
4783@noindent
4784This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4785address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4786@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4787following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4788@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4789@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4790
4791C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4792like the following.
4793
4794@smallexample
4795@group
4796 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4797 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4798 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4799@end group
4800@end smallexample
4801
4802Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4803everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4804example could have been written identically as follows.
4805
4806@smallexample
4807@group
4808 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4809 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4810 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4811 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4812 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4813 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4814 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4815@end group
4816@end smallexample
4817
4818@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4819@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4820@kindex MEMORY
4821@cindex memory regions
4822@cindex regions of memory
4823@cindex allocating memory
4824@cindex discontinuous memory
4825The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4826memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4827
4828The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4829memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4830may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4831can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4832set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4833regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4834around to fit into the available regions.
4835
4836A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4837command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4838you wish. The syntax is:
4839@smallexample
4840@group
a1ab1d2a 4841MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4842 @{
4843 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4844 @dots{}
4845 @}
4846@end group
4847@end smallexample
4848
4849The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4850region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4851Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4852with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4853must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4854add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4855command.
252b5132
RH
4856
4857@cindex memory region attributes
4858The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4859whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4860not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4861@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4862section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4863the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4864them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4865
4866The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4867@table @samp
4868@item R
4869Read-only section
4870@item W
4871Read/write section
4872@item X
4873Executable section
4874@item A
4875Allocatable section
4876@item I
4877Initialized section
4878@item L
4879Same as @samp{I}
4880@item !
c09e9a8c 4881Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4882@end table
4883
4884If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4885@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4886attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4887in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4888attributes.
4889
4890@kindex ORIGIN =
4891@kindex o =
4892@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4893The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4894the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4895cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4896abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4897@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4898
4899@kindex LENGTH =
4900@kindex len =
4901@kindex l =
4902The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4903region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4904be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4905@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4906
4907In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4908available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4909and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4910linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4911is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4912or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4913explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4914region.
4915
4916@smallexample
4917@group
a1ab1d2a 4918MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4919 @{
4920 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4921 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4922 @}
4923@end group
4924@end smallexample
4925
4926Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4927specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4928@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4929a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4930output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4931was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4932the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4933output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4934region, the linker will issue an error message.
4935
3ec57632 4936It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4937expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4938@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4939
4940@smallexample
4941@group
c0065db7 4942 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4943@end group
4944@end smallexample
4945
252b5132
RH
4946@node PHDRS
4947@section PHDRS Command
4948@kindex PHDRS
4949@cindex program headers
4950@cindex ELF program headers
4951@cindex program segments
4952@cindex segments, ELF
4953The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4954@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4955loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4956program with the @samp{-p} option.
4957
4958When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4959reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4960program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4961This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4962interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4963
4964The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4965in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4966precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4967the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4968not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4969
4970The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4971generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4972ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4973
4974This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4975@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4976
4977@smallexample
4978@group
4979PHDRS
4980@{
4981 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4982 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4983@}
4984@end group
4985@end smallexample
4986
4987The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4988of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4989header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4990with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4991must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4992is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4993
4994Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4995system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4996specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4997sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4998attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4999Section Phdr}.
5000
5001It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5002merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5003repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5004contain the section.
5005
5006If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5007then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5008not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5009convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5010placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5011default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5012segment at all.
5013
5014@kindex FILEHDR
5015@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5016You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5017the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5018The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5019file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5020include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5021segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5022these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5023
5024The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5025value of the keyword.
5026
5027@table @asis
5028@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5029Indicates an unused program header.
5030
5031@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5032Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5033the file.
5034
5035@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5036Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5037
5038@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5039Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5040found.
5041
5042@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5043Indicates a segment holding note information.
5044
5045@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5046A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5047ABI.
5048
5049@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5050Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5051
5052@item @var{expression}
5053An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5054be used for types not defined above.
5055@end table
5056
5057You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5058in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5059@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5060Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5061output section attribute.
5062
5063The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5064which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5065explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5066an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5067header.
5068
5069Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5070headers used on a native ELF system.
5071
5072@example
5073@group
5074PHDRS
5075@{
5076 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5077 interp PT_INTERP ;
5078 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5079 data PT_LOAD ;
5080 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5081@}
5082
5083SECTIONS
5084@{
5085 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5086 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5087 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5088 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5089 @dots{}
5090 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5091 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5092 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5093 @dots{}
5094@}
5095@end group
5096@end example
5097
5098@node VERSION
5099@section VERSION Command
5100@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5101@cindex symbol versions
5102@cindex version script
5103@cindex versions of symbols
5104The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5105only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5106symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5107a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5108shared library.
5109
5110You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5111you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5112also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5113
5114The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5115@smallexample
5116VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5117@end smallexample
5118
5119The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5120Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5121version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5122version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5123version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5124scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5125library.
5126
5127The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5128examples.
5129
5130@smallexample
5131VERS_1.1 @{
5132 global:
5133 foo1;
5134 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5135 old*;
5136 original*;
5137 new*;
252b5132
RH
5138@};
5139
5140VERS_1.2 @{
5141 foo2;
5142@} VERS_1.1;
5143
5144VERS_2.0 @{
5145 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5146 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5147 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5148 "f(int, double)";
5149 @};
252b5132
RH
5150@} VERS_1.2;
5151@end smallexample
5152
5153This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5154version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5155The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5156a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5157of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5158symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5159is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5160in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5161However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5162name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5163
5164Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5165depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5166to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5167
5168Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5169depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5170and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5171
5172When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5173specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5174unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5175unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5176somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5177wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5178wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5179set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5180ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5181
5182The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5183they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5184could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5185However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5186
0f6bf451 5187Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5188in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5189symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5190won't.
5191
5192@smallexample
7c9c73be 5193@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5194@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5195
252b5132
RH
5196When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5197symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5198requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5199shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5200loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5201linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5202application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5203way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5204all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5205search for each symbol reference.
5206
5207The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5208doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5209that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5210functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5211the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5212required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5213that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5214versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5215the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5216
5217There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5218first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5219source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5220script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5221maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5222@smallexample
5223__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5224@end smallexample
5225@noindent
5226in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5227be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5228The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5229@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5230takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5231
5232The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5233function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5234an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5235version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5236linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5237
5238To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5239source file. Here is an example:
5240
5241@smallexample
5242__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5243__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5244__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5245__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5246@end smallexample
5247
5248In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5249unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5250example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5251@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5252
5253When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5254some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5255this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5256@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5257declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5258you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5259
5260If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5261within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5262(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5263specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5264
cb840a31
L
5265You can also specify the language in the version script:
5266
5267@smallexample
5268VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5269@end smallexample
5270
c0065db7 5271The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5272The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5273demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5274patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5275@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5276
86043bbb
MM
5277Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5278described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5279or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5280the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5281whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5282cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5283might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5284should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5285expect when you upgrade.
5286
252b5132
RH
5287@node Expressions
5288@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5289@cindex expressions
5290@cindex arithmetic
5291The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5292that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5293expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5294host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5295
5296You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5297
5298The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5299expressions.
5300
5301@menu
5302* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5303* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5304* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5305* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5306* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5307* Operators:: Operators
5308* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5309* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5310* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5311@end menu
5312
5313@node Constants
5314@subsection Constants
5315@cindex integer notation
5316@cindex constants in linker scripts
5317All constants are integers.
5318
5319As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5320octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5321hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5322@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5323@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5324value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5325
5326@cindex scaled integers
5327@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5328@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5329@cindex suffixes for integers
5330@cindex integer suffixes
5331In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5332constant by
5333@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5334@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5335@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5336@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5337@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5338@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5339@tex
5340${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5341@end tex
5342@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5343respectively. For example, the following
5344all refer to the same quantity:
5345
252b5132 5346@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5347_fourk_1 = 4K;
5348_fourk_2 = 4096;
5349_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5350_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5351@end smallexample
5352
8a308ae8
NC
5353Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5354conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5355
0c71d759
NC
5356@node Symbolic Constants
5357@subsection Symbolic Constants
5358@cindex symbolic constants
5359@kindex CONSTANT
5360It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5361the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5362
5363@table @code
5364@item MAXPAGESIZE
5365@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5366The target's maximum page size.
5367
5368@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5369@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5370The target's default page size.
5371@end table
5372
5373So for example:
5374
5375@smallexample
9d5777a3 5376 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5377@end smallexample
5378
5379will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5380supported by the target.
5381
252b5132
RH
5382@node Symbols
5383@subsection Symbol Names
5384@cindex symbol names
5385@cindex names
5386@cindex quoted symbol names
5387@kindex "
5388Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5389and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5390Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5391specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5392keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5393@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5394"SECTION" = 9;
5395"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5396@end smallexample
5397
5398Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5399to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5400whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5401
ecca9871
L
5402@node Orphan Sections
5403@subsection Orphan Sections
5404@cindex orphan
5405Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5406are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5407script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5408output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5409placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5410attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5411same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5412If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5413at the end of the file.
5414
5415For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5416well as section flag.
5417
41911f68 5418If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5419the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5420__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5421section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5422orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5423representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5424character.
5425
252b5132
RH
5426@node Location Counter
5427@subsection The Location Counter
5428@kindex .
5429@cindex dot
5430@cindex location counter
5431@cindex current output location
5432The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5433current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5434location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5435within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5436anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5437
5438@cindex holes
5439Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5440moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5441location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5442and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5443doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5444
5445@smallexample
5446SECTIONS
5447@{
5448 output :
5449 @{
5450 file1(.text)
5451 . = . + 1000;
5452 file2(.text)
5453 . += 1000;
5454 file3(.text)
563e308f 5455 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5456@}
5457@end smallexample
5458@noindent
5459In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5460located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5461followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5462@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5463@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5464specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5465
5c6bbab8
NC
5466@cindex dot inside sections
5467Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5468current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5469statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5470absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5471however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5472not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5473
5474@smallexample
5475SECTIONS
5476@{
5477 . = 0x100
5478 .text: @{
5479 *(.text)
5480 . = 0x200
5481 @}
5482 . = 0x500
5483 .data: @{
5484 *(.data)
5485 . += 0x600
5486 @}
5487@}
5488@end smallexample
5489
5490The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5491and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5492the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5493much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5494move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5495and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5496the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5497the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5498
b5666f2f
AM
5499@cindex dot outside sections
5500Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5501output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5502needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5503
5504@smallexample
5505SECTIONS
5506@{
5507 start_of_text = . ;
5508 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5509 end_of_text = . ;
5510
5511 start_of_data = . ;
5512 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5513 end_of_data = . ;
5514@}
5515@end smallexample
5516
5517If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5518not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5519between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5520should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5521blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5522the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5523sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5524statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5525special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5526place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5527as follows:
5528
5529@smallexample
5530SECTIONS
5531@{
5532 start_of_text = . ;
5533 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5534 end_of_text = . ;
5535
5536 start_of_data = . ;
5537 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5538 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5539 end_of_data = . ;
5540@}
5541@end smallexample
5542
5543This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5544@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5545placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5546assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5547a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5548section. So you could write:
5549
5550@smallexample
5551SECTIONS
5552@{
5553 start_of_text = . ;
5554 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5555 end_of_text = . ;
5556
5557 . = . ;
5558 start_of_data = . ;
5559 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5560 end_of_data = . ;
5561@}
5562@end smallexample
5563
5564Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5565@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5566
252b5132
RH
5567@need 2000
5568@node Operators
5569@subsection Operators
5570@cindex operators for arithmetic
5571@cindex arithmetic operators
5572@cindex precedence in expressions
5573The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5574the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5575@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5576@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5577@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5578@smallexample
5579precedence associativity Operators Notes
5580(highest)
55811 left ! - ~ (1)
55822 left * / %
55833 left + -
55844 left >> <<
55855 left == != > < <= >=
55866 left &
55877 left |
55888 left &&
55899 left ||
559010 right ? :
559111 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5592(lowest)
5593@end smallexample
5594Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5595(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5596(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5597@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5598@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5599@tex
5600\vskip \baselineskip
5601%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5602\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5603\hrule
5604\halign
5605{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5606height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5607&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5608height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5609\noalign{\hrule}
5610height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5611&highest&&&&&\cr
5612% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5613&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5614&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5615&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5616&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5617&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5618&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5619&7&&left&&|&\cr
5620&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5621&9&&left&&||&\cr
5622&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5623&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5624&lowest&&&&&\cr
5625height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5626\hrule}
5627@end tex
5628@iftex
5629{
5630@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5631@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5632@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5633}
5634@end iftex
5635@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5636
5637@node Evaluation
5638@subsection Evaluation
5639@cindex lazy evaluation
5640@cindex expression evaluation order
5641The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5642an expression when absolutely necessary.
5643
5644The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5645address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5646regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5647as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5648
5649However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5650until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5651other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5652for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5653
5654The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5655assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5656allocation.
5657
5658Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5659@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5660
5661If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5662available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5663following
5664@smallexample
5665@group
5666SECTIONS
5667 @{
a1ab1d2a 5668 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5669 @{ *(.text) @}
5670 @}
5671@end group
5672@end smallexample
5673@noindent
5674will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5675address}.
5676
5677@node Expression Section
5678@subsection The Section of an Expression
5679@cindex expression sections
5680@cindex absolute expressions
5681@cindex relative expressions
5682@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5683@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5684@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5685Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5686relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5687using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5688value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5689symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5690operations.
5691
abf4be64
AM
5692Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5693section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5694address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5695@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5696functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5697One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5698(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5699differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5700versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5701section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5702Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5703absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5704given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5705everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5706
5707In the following simple example,
252b5132 5708
7542af2a
AM
5709@smallexample
5710@group
5711SECTIONS
5712 @{
5713 . = 0x100;
5714 __executable_start = 0x100;
5715 .data :
5716 @{
5717 . = 0x10;
5718 __data_start = 0x10;
5719 *(.data)
5720 @}
5721 @dots{}
5722 @}
5723@end group
5724@end smallexample
252b5132 5725
7542af2a
AM
5726both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5727address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5728@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5729section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5730
5c3049d2
AM
5731For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5732addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5733
5734@itemize @bullet
5735@item
c05f749e
AM
5736Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5737operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5738absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5739@item
7542af2a
AM
5740Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5741relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5742and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5743@item
c05f749e
AM
5744Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5745in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5746address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5747before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5748@end itemize
5749
5750The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5751
5752@itemize @bullet
5753@item
5754An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5755@item
5756The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5757@item
9bc8bb33 5758The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5759relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5760(after above conversions) is also a number.
5761@item
5762The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5763relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5764section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5765@item
5766The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5767conversions) is an absolute address.
5768@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5769
5770You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5771to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5772create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5773section @samp{.data}:
5774@smallexample
5775SECTIONS
5776 @{
5777 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5778 @}
5779@end smallexample
5780@noindent
5781If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5782@samp{.data} section.
5783
7542af2a
AM
5784Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5785particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5786
252b5132
RH
5787@node Builtin Functions
5788@subsection Builtin Functions
5789@cindex functions in expressions
5790The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5791use in linker script expressions.
5792
5793@table @code
5794@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5795@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5796@cindex expression, absolute
5797Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5798of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5799value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5800normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5801
5802@item ADDR(@var{section})
5803@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5804@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5805Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5806script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5807the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5808@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5809@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5810the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5811@smallexample
5812@group
5813SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5814 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5815 @{
252b5132
RH
5816 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5817 @dots{}
5818 @}
5819 .output :
5820 @{
5821 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5822 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5823 @}
5824@dots{} @}
5825@end group
5826@end smallexample
5827
876f4090
NS
5828@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5829@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5830@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5831@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5832@cindex round up location counter
5833@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5834@cindex round up expression
5835@cindex align expression
5836Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5837to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5838doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5839arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5840expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5841equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5842
5843Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5844next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5845variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5846input sections:
252b5132
RH
5847@smallexample
5848@group
5849SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5850 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5851 *(.data)
5852 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5853 @}
5854@dots{} @}
5855@end group
5856@end smallexample
5857@noindent
5858The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5859a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5860a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5861of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5862
5863The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5864
362c1d1a
NS
5865@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5866@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5867@cindex section alignment
5868Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5869been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5870evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5871the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5872value in that section.
5873@smallexample
5874@group
5875SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5876 .output @{
5877 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5878 @dots{}
5879 @}
5880@dots{} @}
5881@end group
5882@end smallexample
5883
252b5132
RH
5884@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5885@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5886This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5887scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5888section.
5889
2d20f7bf
JJ
5890@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5891@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5892This is equivalent to either
5893@smallexample
5894(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5895@end smallexample
5896or
5897@smallexample
5898(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5899@end smallexample
5900@noindent
5901depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5902for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5903@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5904If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5905memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5906bytes in the on-disk file.
5907
5908This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5909any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5910@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5911be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5912working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5913
5914@noindent
5915Example:
5916@smallexample
5917 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5918@end smallexample
5919
5920@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5921@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5922This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5923evaluation purposes.
5924
5925@smallexample
5926 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5927@end smallexample
5928
a4f5ad88
JJ
5929@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5930@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5931This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5932@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5933When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5934does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5935@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5936boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5937it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5938@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5939padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5940section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5941
5942@smallexample
5943 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5944@end smallexample
5945
252b5132
RH
5946@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5947@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5948@cindex symbol defaults
5949Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5950defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5951return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5952default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5953shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5954the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5955existed, its value is preserved:
5956
5957@smallexample
5958@group
5959SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5960 .text : @{
5961 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5962 @dots{}
5963 @}
5964 @dots{}
5965@}
5966@end group
5967@end smallexample
5968
3ec57632
NC
5969@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5970@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5971Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5972
252b5132
RH
5973@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5974@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5975@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5976Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5977Section LMA}).
5978
2e53f7d6
NC
5979@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5980@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5981Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5982@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5983
252b5132
RH
5984@kindex MAX
5985@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5986Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5987
5988@kindex MIN
5989@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5990Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5991
5992@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5993@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5994@cindex unallocated address, next
5995Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5996This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5997use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5998output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5999
3ec57632
NC
6000@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6001@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6002Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6003
ba916c8a
MM
6004@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6005@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6006Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6007value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6008@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6009will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6010can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6011``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6012name.
6013
252b5132
RH
6014@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6015@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6016@cindex section size
6017Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6018been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6019evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6020@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6021@smallexample
6022@group
6023SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6024 .output @{
6025 .start = . ;
6026 @dots{}
6027 .end = . ;
6028 @}
6029 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6030 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6031@dots{} @}
6032@end group
6033@end smallexample
6034
6035@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6036@itemx sizeof_headers
6037@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6038@cindex header size
6039Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6040information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6041this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6042choose, to facilitate paging.
6043
6044@cindex not enough room for program headers
6045@cindex program headers, not enough room
6046When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6047@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6048number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6049addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6050additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6051room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6052the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6053script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6054you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6055command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6056@end table
6057
6058@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6059@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6060@cindex implicit linker scripts
6061If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6062an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6063linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6064linker will report an error.
6065
6066An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6067
6068Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6069assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6070commands.
6071
6072Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6073at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6074read. This can affect archive searching.
6075
6076@ifset GENERIC
6077@node Machine Dependent
6078@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6079
6080@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6081@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6082sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6083functionality are not listed.
6084
6085@menu
36f63dca
NC
6086@ifset H8300
6087* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6088@end ifset
6089@ifset I960
6090* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6091@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6092@ifset M68HC11
6093* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6094@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6095@ifset ARM
6096* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6097@end ifset
6098@ifset HPPA
6099* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6100@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6101@ifset M68K
6102* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6103@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6104@ifset MIPS
6105* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6106@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6107@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6108* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6109@end ifset
2469cfa2 6110@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6111* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6112@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6113@ifset NDS32
6114* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6115@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6116@ifset NIOSII
6117* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6118@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6119@ifset POWERPC
6120* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6121@end ifset
6122@ifset POWERPC64
6123* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6124@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6125@ifset SPU
6126* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6127@end ifset
74459f0e 6128@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6129* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6130@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6131@ifset WIN32
6132* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6133@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6134@ifset XTENSA
6135* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6136@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6137@end menu
6138@end ifset
6139
252b5132
RH
6140@ifset H8300
6141@ifclear GENERIC
6142@raisesections
6143@end ifclear
6144
6145@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6146@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6147
6148@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6149For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6150you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6151
6152@table @emph
6153@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6154@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6155@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6156targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6157program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6158respectively.
6159
6160@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6161@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6162@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6163@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6164sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6165page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6166(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6167@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6168top page of memory).
1502569c 6169
81f5558e
NC
6170@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6171indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6172displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6173the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6174@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6175whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6176range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6177
1502569c 6178@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6179@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6180biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6181which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6182page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6183(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6184@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6185the top page of memory).
6186
6187@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6188@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
618932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6190changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6191(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6192@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6193the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6194@end table
6195
6196@ifclear GENERIC
6197@lowersections
6198@end ifclear
6199@end ifset
6200
36f63dca 6201@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6202@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6203@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6204@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6205@node Renesas
6206@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6207
c2dcd04e
NC
6208@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6209H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6210options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6211@end ifset
6212@end ifclear
6213
6214@ifset I960
6215@ifclear GENERIC
6216@raisesections
6217@end ifclear
6218
6219@node i960
6220@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6221
6222@cindex i960 support
6223
6224You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6225specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6226family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6227incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6228linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6229libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6230search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6231
6232For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6233well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6234paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6235the names
6236
6237@smallexample
6238@group
6239try
6240libtry.a
6241tryca
6242libtryca.a
6243@end group
6244@end smallexample
6245
6246@noindent
6247The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6248two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6249
6250You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6251the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6252use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6253specifies a library.
6254
6255@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6256@cindex relaxing on i960
6257@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6258you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6259@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6260them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6261instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6262instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6263target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6264not itself call any subroutines).
6265
6266@ifclear GENERIC
6267@lowersections
6268@end ifclear
6269@end ifset
6270
6271@ifset ARM
6272@ifclear GENERIC
6273@raisesections
6274@end ifclear
6275
93fd0973
SC
6276@ifset M68HC11
6277@ifclear GENERIC
6278@raisesections
6279@end ifclear
6280
6281@node M68HC11/68HC12
6282@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6283
6284@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6285
6286@subsection Linker Relaxation
6287
6288For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6289optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6290
6291@table @emph
6292@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6293@item relaxing address modes
6294@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6295targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6296program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6297respectively.
6298
6299@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6300transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6301page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6302
6303@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6304When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6305of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6306addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6307@code{bset} instructions.
6308
6309@end table
6310
6311@subsection Trampoline Generation
6312
6313@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6314@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6315For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6316call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6317will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6318trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6319case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6320point to the function trampoline.
6321
6322@ifclear GENERIC
6323@lowersections
6324@end ifclear
6325@end ifset
6326
36f63dca 6327@node ARM
3674e28a 6328@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6329
6330@cindex ARM interworking support
6331@kindex --support-old-code
6332For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6333between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6334been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6335line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6336libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6337option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6338given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6339which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6340the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6341non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6342
6343@cindex thumb entry point
6344@cindex entry point, thumb
6345@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6346The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6347@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6348But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6349branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6350executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6351
ce11ba6c
KT
6352@cindex PE import table prefixing
6353@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6354The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6355the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6356element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6357import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6358
e489d0ae
PB
6359@cindex BE8
6360@kindex --be8
6361The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6362executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6363The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6364
3674e28a
PB
6365@cindex TARGET1
6366@kindex --target1-rel
6367@kindex --target1-abs
6368The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6369@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6370or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6371and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6372
6373@cindex TARGET2
6374@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6375The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6376@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6377meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6378@table @samp
6379@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6380@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6381@item abs
6382@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6383@item got-rel
6384@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6385@end table
6386
319850b4
JB
6387@cindex FIX_V4BX
6388@kindex --fix-v4bx
6389The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6390specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6391interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6392also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6393
6394In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6395linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6396@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6397
6398In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6399relocations are ignored.
6400
845b51d6
PB
6401@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6402@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6403Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6404relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6405
6406@smallexample
6407TST rM, #1
6408MOVEQ PC, rM
6409BX Rn
6410@end smallexample
6411
6412This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6413and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6414condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6415
33bfe774
JB
6416@cindex USE_BLX
6417@kindex --use-blx
6418The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6419BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6420situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6421code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6422each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6423
6424This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6425specify it if you are using that target.
6426
c6dd86c6
JB
6427@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6428@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6429The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6430bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6431instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6432to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6433the support code can read the intended values.
6434
6435The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6436intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6437and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6438intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6439full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6440you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6441
6442If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6443enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6444@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6445mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6446vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6447@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6448
6449If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6450potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6451such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6452first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6453instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6454the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6455are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6456
2de70689
MGD
6457@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6458@kindex --fix-arm1176
6459@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6460The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6461in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6462are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6463unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6464
9d5777a3 6465Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6466Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6467http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6468
bf21ed78
MS
6469@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6470@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6471The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6472warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6473enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6474linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6475using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6476not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6477
6478@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6479@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6480The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6481warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6482@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6483linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6484using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6485
726150b7
NC
6486@cindex PIC_VENEER
6487@kindex --pic-veneer
6488The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6489ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6490is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6491@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6492
6493@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6494@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6495The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6496code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6497perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6498placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6499controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6500The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6501duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6502group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6503code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6504where they should be placed.
6505
6506The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6507@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6508placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6509branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6510placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6511value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6512exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6513A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6514linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6515from the input sections.
6516
6517The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6518@samp{N = +1}.
6519
1a51c1a4
NC
6520Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6521only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6522otherwise.
6523
1db37fe6
YG
6524@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6525@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6526@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6527The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6528
6529The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6530
6531@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6532@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6533@cindex Merging exidx entries
6534The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6535
6536@kindex --long-plt
6537@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6538The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6539which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6540entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6541
36f63dca
NC
6542@ifclear GENERIC
6543@lowersections
6544@end ifclear
6545@end ifset
6546
6547@ifset HPPA
6548@ifclear GENERIC
6549@raisesections
6550@end ifclear
6551
6552@node HPPA ELF32
6553@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6554@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6555@kindex --multi-subspace
6556When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6557import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6558The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6559stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6560multiple sub-spaces.
6561
6562@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6563@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6564Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6565stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6566@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6567sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6568a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6569the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6570conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6571prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6572A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6573branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6574@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6575@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6576detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6577positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6578
6579Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6580single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6581create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6582large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6583
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@lowersections
6586@end ifclear
6587@end ifset
6588
7fb9f789
NC
6589@ifset M68K
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@raisesections
6592@end ifclear
6593
6594@node M68K
6595@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6596
6597@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6598@kindex --got=@var{type}
6599The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6600The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6601@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6602the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6603@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6604entries only at non-negative offsets.
6605@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6606entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6607support such GOTs.
6608@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6609output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6610file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6611files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6612
6613@ifclear GENERIC
6614@lowersections
6615@end ifclear
6616@end ifset
6617
833794fc
MR
6618@ifset MIPS
6619@ifclear GENERIC
6620@raisesections
6621@end ifclear
6622
6623@node MIPS
6624@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6625
6626@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6627@kindex --insn32
6628@kindex --no-insn32
6629The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6630microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6631in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6632used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6633or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6634including 16-bit ones where possible.
6635
6636@ifclear GENERIC
6637@lowersections
6638@end ifclear
6639@end ifset
6640
36f63dca
NC
6641@ifset MMIX
6642@ifclear GENERIC
6643@raisesections
6644@end ifclear
6645
6646@node MMIX
6647@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6648For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6649@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6650understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6651can translate between the two formats.
6652
6653There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6654Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6655registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6656equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6657@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6658global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6659this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6660symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6661
7a2de473
HPN
6662Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6663@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6664The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6665of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6666
6667Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6668are left out from an mmo file.
6669
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@lowersections
6672@end ifclear
6673@end ifset
6674
6675@ifset MSP430
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@raisesections
6678@end ifclear
6679
6680@node MSP430
6681@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6682For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6683will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6684just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6685
6686@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6687The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6688
6689@table @code
6690@item @samp{.vectors}
6691Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6692
6693@item @samp{.bootloader}
6694Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6695in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6696
6697@item @samp{.infomem}
6698Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6699this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6700
c0065db7 6701@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6702This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6703in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6704
6705@item @samp{.noinit}
6706Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6707
c0065db7 6708The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6709@end table
6710
6711@ifclear GENERIC
6712@lowersections
6713@end ifclear
6714@end ifset
6715
35c08157
KLC
6716@ifset NDS32
6717@ifclear GENERIC
6718@raisesections
6719@end ifclear
6720
6721@node NDS32
6722@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6723@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6724For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6725relaxes objects according to these options.
6726
6727@table @code
6728@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6729Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6730
6731@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6732Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6733
6734@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6735Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6736
6737@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6738Export the EX9 table after linking.
6739
6740@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6741Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6742
6743@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6744Update the existing EX9 table.
6745
6746@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6747Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6748
6749@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6750Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6751
6752@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6753Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6754
6755@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6756Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6757@end table
6758
6759@ifclear GENERIC
6760@lowersections
6761@end ifclear
6762@end ifset
6763
78058a5e
SL
6764@ifset NIOSII
6765@ifclear GENERIC
6766@raisesections
6767@end ifclear
6768
6769@node Nios II
6770@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6771@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6772@kindex --relax on Nios II
6773
6774Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6775transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6776which may result in @command{ld} giving
6777@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6778The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6779trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6780outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6781trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6782be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6783larger than 256MB.
6784
6785The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6786is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6787@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6788locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6789source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6790register as a temporary.
6791
6792Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6793relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6794option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6795
6796@ifclear GENERIC
6797@lowersections
6798@end ifclear
6799@end ifset
6800
2a60a7a8
AM
6801@ifset POWERPC
6802@ifclear GENERIC
6803@raisesections
6804@end ifclear
6805
6806@node PowerPC ELF32
6807@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6808@cindex PowerPC long branches
6809@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6810Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6811displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6812@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6813@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6814the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6815section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6816section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6817@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6818both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6819considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6820
6821@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6822@table @option
6823@cindex PowerPC PLT
6824@kindex --bss-plt
6825@item --bss-plt
6826Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6827generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6828the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6829writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6830@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6831PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6832compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6833BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6834
016687f8
AM
6835@kindex --secure-plt
6836@item --secure-plt
6837@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6838@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6839when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6840layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6841style BSS PLT.
6842
2a60a7a8
AM
6843@cindex PowerPC GOT
6844@kindex --sdata-got
6845@item --sdata-got
6846The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6847sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6848@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6849section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6850@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6851@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6852@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6853@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6854PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6855pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6856GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6857really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6858
6859@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6860@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6861@item --emit-stub-syms
6862This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6863symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6864
6865@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6866@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6867@item --no-tls-optimize
6868PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6869sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6870disable the optimization.
6871@end table
6872
6873@ifclear GENERIC
6874@lowersections
6875@end ifclear
6876@end ifset
6877
6878@ifset POWERPC64
6879@ifclear GENERIC
6880@raisesections
6881@end ifclear
6882
6883@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6884@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6885
6886@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6887@table @option
6888@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6889@kindex --stub-group-size
6890@item --stub-group-size
6891Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6892by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6893@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6894sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6895a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6896the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6897conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6898prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6899A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6900branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6901@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6902@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6903detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6904positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6905
6906Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6907single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6908create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6909large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6910
6911@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6912@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6913@item --emit-stub-syms
6914This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6915symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6916
6917@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6918@kindex --dotsyms
6919@kindex --no-dotsyms
6920@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6921These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6922in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6923function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6924code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6925properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6926to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6927@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6928dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6929feature.
6930
6931@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6932@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6933@item --no-tls-optimize
6934PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6935sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6936disable the optimization.
6937
6938@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6939@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6940@item --no-opd-optimize
6941PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6942corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6943the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6944Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6945
6946@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6947@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6948@item --non-overlapping-opd
6949Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6950@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6951the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6952entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6953
6954@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6955@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6956@item --no-toc-optimize
6957PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6958entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6959reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6960marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6961marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6962relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6963unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6964reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6965discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6966reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6967code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6968optimization.
6969
6970@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6971@kindex --no-multi-toc
6972@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6973If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6974@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6975where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6976entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6977total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6978grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6979TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6980calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6981help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
698264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6983Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6984
6985@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6986@kindex --no-toc-sort
6987@item --no-toc-sort
6988By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6989happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6990placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6991with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6992referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6993@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6994results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6995off this feature.
6996
6997@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6998@kindex --plt-align
6999@kindex --no-plt-align
7000@item --plt-align
7001@itemx --no-plt-align
7002Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7003aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7004boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7005are packed tightly.
7006
7007@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7008@kindex --plt-static-chain
7009@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7010@item --plt-static-chain
7011@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7012Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7013chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7014chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7015
7016@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7017@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7018@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7019@item --plt-thread-safe
7020@itemx --no-thread-safe
7021With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7022lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7023another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7024order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7025memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7026barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7027looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7028seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7029default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7030@end table
7031
7032@ifclear GENERIC
7033@lowersections
7034@end ifclear
7035@end ifset
7036
49fa1e15
AM
7037@ifset SPU
7038@ifclear GENERIC
7039@raisesections
7040@end ifclear
7041
7042@node SPU ELF
7043@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7044
7045@cindex SPU ELF options
7046@table @option
7047
7048@cindex SPU plugins
7049@kindex --plugin
7050@item --plugin
7051This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7052
7053@cindex SPU overlays
7054@kindex --no-overlays
7055@item --no-overlays
7056Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7057regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7058@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7059turns off all this special overlay handling.
7060
7061@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7062@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7063@item --emit-stub-syms
7064This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7065symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7066
7067@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7068@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7069@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7070This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7071function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7072on calls to non-overlay regions.
7073
7074@cindex SPU local store size
7075@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7076@item --local-store=lo:hi
7077@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7078the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7079range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7080
c0065db7 7081@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7082@kindex --stack-analysis
7083@item --stack-analysis
7084SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7085unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7086under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7087@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7088@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7089determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7090for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7091for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7092for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7093find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7094and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7095under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7096dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7097is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7098and calls will be given.
7099
c0065db7 7100@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7101@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7102@item --emit-stack-syms
7103This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7104in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7105These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7106functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7107functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7108such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7109The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7110@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7111@end table
7112
7113@ifclear GENERIC
7114@lowersections
7115@end ifclear
7116@end ifset
7117
36f63dca
NC
7118@ifset TICOFF
7119@ifclear GENERIC
7120@raisesections
7121@end ifclear
7122
7123@node TI COFF
7124@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7125@cindex TI COFF versions
7126@kindex --format=@var{version}
7127The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7128TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7129also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7130format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7131header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7132
7133@ifclear GENERIC
7134@lowersections
7135@end ifclear
7136@end ifset
7137
2ca22b03
NC
7138@ifset WIN32
7139@ifclear GENERIC
7140@raisesections
7141@end ifclear
7142
7143@node WIN32
7144@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7145
c0065db7 7146This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7147See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7148command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7149
7150@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7151@cindex import libraries
7152@item import libraries
69da35b5 7153The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7154libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7155regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7156archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7157support for creating such libraries provided with the
7158@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7159
c0065db7
RM
7160@item exporting DLL symbols
7161@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7162The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7163
7164@table @emph
7165@item using auto-export functionality
7166@cindex using auto-export functionality
7167By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7168which is controlled by the following command line options:
7169
0a5d968e
NC
7170@itemize
7171@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7172@item --exclude-symbols
7173@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7174@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7175@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7176@end itemize
7177
09e2aba4
DK
7178When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7179(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7180symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7181often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7182private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7183options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7184exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7185final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7186
7187If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7188command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7189if either of the following are true:
7190
7191@itemize
7192@item A DEF file is used.
7193@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7194@end itemize
dc8465bf 7195
c0065db7
RM
7196@item using a DEF file
7197@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7198Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7199an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7200exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7201name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7202command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7203
7204@example
7205gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7206@end example
7207
0a5d968e
NC
7208Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7209@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7210
dc8465bf
NC
7211Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7212
7213@example
4b5bd4e7 7214LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7215
7216EXPORTS
7217foo
7218bar
7219_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7220another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7221var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7222doo = foo == foo2
7223eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7224@end example
dc8465bf 7225
7fcab871 7226This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7227symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7228alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7229by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7230@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7231@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7232export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7233in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7234symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7235
6b31ad16
DS
7236The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7237name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7238the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7239
b45619c0
NC
7240When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7241library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7242@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7243executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7244
7245With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7246specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7247non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7248
7249If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7250or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7251filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7252
4b5bd4e7
DS
7253The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7254
7255@example
7256EXPORTS
7257 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7258 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7259 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7260@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7261
7262Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7263@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7264@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7265@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7266Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7267@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7268string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7269
7270The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7271
7272@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7273will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7274by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7275linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7276library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7277
7278@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7279The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7280the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7281@code{*_imp__foo}).
7282
7283@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7284well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7285read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7286variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7287the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7288extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7289application will behave unexpectedly.
7290
7291@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7292it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7293symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7294API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7295the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7296
4b5bd4e7
DS
7297See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7298other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7299
7300@cindex creating a DEF file
7301While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7302with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7303
7304@item Using decorations
7305@cindex Using decorations
7306Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7307itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7308declared as:
7309
7310@example
7311__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7312__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7313@end example
7314
7315All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7316any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7317this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7318the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7319
7320Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7321decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7322instead:
7323
7324@example
7325__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7326__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7327@end example
7328
c0065db7
RM
7329This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7330when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7331variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7332code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7333of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7334omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7335@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7336information.
c0065db7 7337@end table
dc8465bf 7338
2ca22b03
NC
7339@cindex automatic data imports
7340@item automatic data imports
7341The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7342by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7343compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7344issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7345code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7346c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7347initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7348decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7349platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7350command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7351The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7352suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7353trigger the feature's use.
7354
c0065db7 7355auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7356additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7357
c0065db7 7358"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7359documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7360
c0065db7
RM
7361The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7362occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7363One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7364below.
7365
7366@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7367For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7368object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7369offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7370field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7371in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7372without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7373The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7374references.
7375
c0065db7
RM
7376The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7377be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7378themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7379runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7380compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7381support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7382run without error on an older system.
7383
c0065db7
RM
7384@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7385enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7386
7387@cindex direct linking to a dll
7388@item direct linking to a dll
7389The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7390including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7391libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7392traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7393libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7394function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7395though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7396storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7397tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7398large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7399
c0065db7 7400Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7401@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7402of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7403perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7404select the dll instead of an import library.
7405
2ca22b03 7406
69da35b5
NC
7407For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7408to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7409
7410@example
45e948fe
NC
7411libxxx.dll.a
7412xxx.dll.a
7413libxxx.a
7414xxx.lib
69da35b5 7415cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7416libxxx.dll
7417xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7418@end example
7419
69da35b5
NC
7420before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7421
c0065db7
RM
7422(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7423where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7424@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7425file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7426@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7427
c0065db7
RM
7428Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7429@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7430was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7431various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7432could coexist on the same machine.
7433
2ca22b03
NC
7434The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7435applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7436libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7437
7438@example
7439bin/
7440 cygxxx.dll
7441lib/
7442 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7443 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7444@end example
7445
c0065db7
RM
7446Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7447done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7448
74491. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7450@example
7451gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7452@end example
2ca22b03 7453
69da35b5
NC
7454However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7455(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7456@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7457not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7458
2ca22b03
NC
74592. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7460directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7461should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7462making the app/dll.
7463
7464@example
7465ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7466@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7467
7468Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7469
7470@example
7471gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7472@end example
69da35b5
NC
7473
7474This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7475perfectly legal
7476
7477@example
7478bin/
7479 cygxxx-5.dll
7480lib/
c0065db7 7481 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7482@end example
7483
dc8465bf 7484Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7485even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7486@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7487
7488Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7489wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7490
74911. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7492work with auto-imported data.
7493
dc8465bf
NC
74942. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7495import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7496symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7497for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7498possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7499
45e948fe
NC
75003. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7501critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7502in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7503stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7504
69da35b5 7505So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7506true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7507a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7508binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7509massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7510requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7511will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7512
c0065db7 7513@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7514@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7515@item adding additional names
7516Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7517A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7518exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7519when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7520import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7521
c0065db7 7522@example
dc8465bf
NC
7523LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7524
7525EXPORTS
c0065db7 7526foo
dc8465bf 7527_foo = foo
c0065db7 7528@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7529
7530The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7531
7532Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7533source code using the "weak" attribute:
7534
c0065db7
RM
7535@example
7536void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7537void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7538@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7539
7540See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7541symbols.
7542
7543@item renaming symbols
7544Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7545kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7546@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7547DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7548created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7549
c0065db7 7550@example
dc8465bf
NC
7551LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7552
7553EXPORTS
7554_foo = foo
c0065db7 7555@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7556
7557The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7558@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7559@end table
dc8465bf 7560
0a5d968e 7561Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7562unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7563If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7564@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7565that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7566@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7567renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7568to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7569the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7570In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7571which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7572
7573@cindex weak externals
7574@item weak externals
7575The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7576weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7577defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7578are three variants of weak externals:
7579@itemize
7580@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7581called lazy externals.
7582@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7583This form is not presently implemented.
7584@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7585implemented.
7586@end itemize
7587As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7588are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7589uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7590
7591@cindex aligned common symbols
7592@item aligned common symbols
7593As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7594desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7595the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7596carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7597by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7598tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7599but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7600warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7601
2ca22b03
NC
7602@end table
7603
7604@ifclear GENERIC
7605@lowersections
7606@end ifclear
7607@end ifset
7608
e0001a05
NC
7609@ifset XTENSA
7610@ifclear GENERIC
7611@raisesections
7612@end ifclear
7613
7614@node Xtensa
7615@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7616
7617@cindex Xtensa processors
7618The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7619@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7620specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7621keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7622example, with the command:
7623
7624@smallexample
7625SECTIONS
7626@{
7627 .text : @{
7628 *(.literal .text)
7629 @}
7630@}
7631@end smallexample
7632
7633@noindent
7634@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7635and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7636literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7637interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7638group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7639files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7640and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7641
43cd72b9 7642@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7643@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7644Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7645provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7646is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7647literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7648will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7649location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7650the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7651unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7652@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7653range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7654
7655For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7656to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7657instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7658instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7659instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7660@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7661hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7662By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7663switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7664density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7665instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7666performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7667linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7668a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7669
7670The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7671control the linker:
7672
7673@cindex Xtensa options
7674@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7675@item --size-opt
7676When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7677more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7678no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7679alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7680preserve the correctness of the code.
7681@end table
e0001a05
NC
7682
7683@ifclear GENERIC
7684@lowersections
7685@end ifclear
7686@end ifset
7687
252b5132
RH
7688@ifclear SingleFormat
7689@node BFD
7690@chapter BFD
7691
7692@cindex back end
7693@cindex object file management
7694@cindex object formats available
7695@kindex objdump -i
7696The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7697These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7698object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7699format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7700it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7701associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7702object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7703(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7704list all the formats available for your configuration.
7705
7706@cindex BFD requirements
7707@cindex requirements for BFD
7708As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7709several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7710BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7711formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7712been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7713BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7714may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7715
7716One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7717mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7718useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7719conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7720
7721@menu
7722* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7723@end menu
7724
7725@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7726@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7727@cindex opening object files
7728@include bfdsumm.texi
7729@end ifclear
7730
7731@node Reporting Bugs
7732@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7733@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7734@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7735
ff5dcc92 7736Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7737
7738Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7739it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7740to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7741work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7742@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7743
7744In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7745information that enables us to fix the bug.
7746
7747@menu
7748* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7749* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7750@end menu
7751
7752@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7753@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7754@cindex bug criteria
7755
7756If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7757
7758@itemize @bullet
7759@cindex fatal signal
7760@cindex linker crash
7761@cindex crash of linker
7762@item
7763If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7764@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7765
7766@cindex error on valid input
7767@item
ff5dcc92 7768If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7769
7770@cindex invalid input
7771@item
ff5dcc92 7772If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7773may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7774object files are correct.
7775
7776@item
7777If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7778improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7779@end itemize
7780
7781@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7782@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7783@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7784@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7785
7786A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7787products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7788recommend you contact that organization first.
7789
7790You can find contact information for many support companies and
7791individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7792distribution.
7793
ad22bfe8 7794@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7795Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7796@value{BUGURL}.
7797@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7798
7799The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7800@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7801fact or leave it out, state it!
7802
7803Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7804problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7805assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7806matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7807the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7808location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7809were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7810into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7811specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7812and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7813
7814Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7815the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7816on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7817
7818Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7819bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7820respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7821You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7822
7823To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7824
7825@itemize @bullet
7826@item
ff5dcc92 7827The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7828the @samp{--version} argument.
7829
7830Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7831the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7832
7833@item
ff5dcc92 7834Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7835patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7836
7837@item
7838The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7839version number.
7840
7841@item
ff5dcc92 7842What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7843``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7844
7845@item
7846The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7847observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7848list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7849sufficient.
7850
7851If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7852and then we might not encounter the bug.
7853
7854@item
7855A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7856bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7857provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7858bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7859state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7860requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7861we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7862attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7863
7864If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7865@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7866object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7867@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7868how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7869
7870@item
7871A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7872incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7873
ff5dcc92 7874Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7875will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7876not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7877a chance to make a mistake.
7878
7879Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7880say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7881copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7882C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7883and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7884fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7885you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7886any conclusion from our observations.
7887
7888@item
ff5dcc92 7889If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7890diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7891@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7892If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7893context, not by line number.
7894
7895The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7896sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7897@end itemize
7898
7899Here are some things that are not necessary:
7900
7901@itemize @bullet
7902@item
7903A description of the envelope of the bug.
7904
7905Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7906which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7907changes will not affect it.
7908
7909This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7910will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7911with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7912We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7913
7914Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7915of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7916output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7917less time, and so on.
7918
7919However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7920report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7921
7922@item
7923A patch for the bug.
7924
7925A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7926the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7927a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7928to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7929
ff5dcc92 7930Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7931construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7932through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7933able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7934fixed.
7935
7936And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7937patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7938help us to understand.
7939
7940@item
7941A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7942
7943Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7944things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7945@end itemize
7946
7947@node MRI
7948@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7949@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7950To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7951linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7952alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7953described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7954simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7955@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7956linker commands; these commands are described here.
7957
7958In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7959file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7960features to make use of them.
7961
7962You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7963@samp{-c} command-line option.
7964
7965Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7966command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7967blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7968MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7969issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7970
7971Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7972
7973You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7974lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7975The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7976
7977@table @code
7978@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7979@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7980@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7981Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7982the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7983@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7984your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7985script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7986commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7987input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7988@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7989
7990@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7991@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7992Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7993in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7994
7995@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7996
7997@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7998@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7999Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8000@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8001
8002@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8003@item BASE @var{expression}
8004Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8005absolute addresses) in the output file.
8006
8007@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8008@item CHIP @var{expression}
8009@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8010This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8011
8012@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8013@item END
8014This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8015
8016@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8017@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8018Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8019language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8020
8021@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8022@item
252b5132
RH
8023S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8024
8025@item
8026IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8027
8028@item
8029COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8030@samp{COFF}
8031@end enumerate
8032
8033@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8034@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8035Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8036@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8037
8038The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8039same line, with no change in its effect.
8040
8041@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8042@item LOAD @var{filename}
8043@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8044Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8045same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8046command line.
8047
8048@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8049@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8050@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8051MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8052option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8053
8054@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8055@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8056@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8057Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8058order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8059script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8060sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8061file, in the order specified.
8062
8063@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8064@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8065@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8066@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8067Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8068@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8069
8070@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8071@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8072@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8073@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8074You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8075specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8076If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8077@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8078@end table
8079
793c5807
NC
8080@node GNU Free Documentation License
8081@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8082@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8083
370b66a1
CD
8084@node LD Index
8085@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8086
8087@printindex cp
8088
8089@tex
7ca01ed9 8090% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8091% meantime:
8092\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8093\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8094\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8095\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8096\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8097\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8098\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8099\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8100\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8101% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8102@end tex
8103
252b5132 8104@bye
This page took 1.117728 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.